Light-emitting device, display device, electronic device, and lighting device

ABSTRACT

One object of this invention is to provide a novel light-emitting device with low power consumption. The light-emitting device includes a first light-emitting element and a second light-emitting element. The first light-emitting element includes a first electrode, a second electrode, and a light-emitting layer. The second light-emitting element includes the first electrode, a third electrode, and the light-emitting layer. The second electrode comprises only a first conductive film, and the third electrode comprises a second conductive film and a third conductive film. The first electrode has a function of reflecting light. The second conductive film has functions of reflecting light and transmitting light. The first conductive film and the third conductive film each have a function of transmitting light.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention

One embodiment of the present invention relates to a light-emittingdevice, or a display device, an electronic device, and a lighting deviceeach including the light-emitting device.

Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to theabove technical field. The technical field of one embodiment of theinvention disclosed in this specification and the like relates to anobject, a method, or a manufacturing method. In addition, one embodimentof the present invention relates to a process, a machine, manufacture,and a composition of matter. Specifically, examples of the technicalfield of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in thisspecification include a semiconductor device, a display device, a liquidcrystal display device, a light-emitting device, a lighting device, apower storage device, a memory device, a method for driving any of them,and a method for manufacturing any of them.

2. Description of the Related Art

In recent years, research and development of light-emitting devicesusing electroluminescence (EL) have been actively carried out. In abasic structure of such a light-emitting device, a layer containing alight-emitting substance (an EL layer) is interposed between a pair ofelectrodes. By application of a voltage between the electrodes of thiselement, light emission from the light-emitting substance can beobtained.

Since the above light-emitting device is a self-luminous type, a displaydevice using this light-emitting device has advantages such as highvisibility, no necessity of a backlight, and low power consumption.Furthermore, such a light-emitting device also has advantages in thatthe element can be formed to be thin and lightweight, and that responsetime is high.

In the case where the above light-emitting device is used for a displaydevice, there are the following two methods: a method of providingsubpixels in a pixel with EL layers having functions of emitting lightof different colors (hereinafter referred to as a separate coloringmethod) and a method of providing subpixels in a pixel with, forexample, a common EL layer having a function of emitting white light andcolor filters each having a function of transmitting light of adifferent color (hereinafter referred to as a color filter method).

One of the advantages of the color filter method is that the EL layercan be shared by all of the subpixels. Therefore, compared with theseparate coloring method, loss of a material of the EL layer is smalland the number of steps needed for formation of the EL layer can bereduced; thus, display devices can be manufactured at low cost with highproductivity. Further, although it is necessary, in the separatecoloring method, to provide a space between the subpixels to preventmixture of the materials of the EL layers in the subpixels, the colorfilter method does not need such a space and therefore enables ahigh-resolution display device having higher pixel density.

The light-emitting device can emit light of a variety of colorsdepending on the kind of light-emitting substances included in the ELlayer. In the view of application of the light-emitting device tolighting devices, a light-emitting device that emits white light orlight of color close to white and has high efficiency is demanded. Inthe view of application of the light-emitting device to fill-colordisplay devices, a high efficiency light-emitting device emitting lightwith high color purity is demanded. In addition, for the light-emittingdevice used for the lighting device and the display device, low powerconsumption is needed.

Increasing the extraction efficiency of light from a light-emittingdevice is important for higher emission efficiency of the light-emittingdevice. In order to increase the extraction efficiency of light from alight-emitting device, a method has been proposed, in which a microoptical resonator (microcavity) structure utilizing a resonant effect oflight between a pair of electrodes is used to increase the intensity oflight having a specific wavelength (e.g., see Patent Document 1).

As a light-emitting device that emits white light, an element includinga charge-generation layer between a plurality of EL layers (a tandemelement) has been proposed.

REFERENCE Patent Document

-   [Patent Document 1] Japanese Published Patent Application No.    2012-182127

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

When a display device that allows full-color display is manufactured bya separate coloring method, a step of evaporating a light-emitting layeronly on a required subpixel with a shadow mask having minute openings isnecessary; therefore, the openings of the shadow mask need to bearranged (aligned) at desired positions with high accuracy (alignmentaccuracy). Moreover, when a light-emitting layer is separately formed inthe required subpixel, a light-emitting substance enters an adjacentsubpixel in some cases, which causes a problem of a decrease in yield inmanufacturing display devices. A display device that has high pixeldensity and allows high-resolution display requires higher alignmentaccuracy, which leads problems of a reduction in yield in manufacturinga display device and a cost increase.

In contrast, the color filter method does not need such a shadow maskhaving minute openings; thus, a display device can be manufactured withhigh productivity. However, since a light-emitting layer for emittingwhite light is shared by subpixels in the color filter method, forexample, light of color which need not be emitted from the subpixels isincluded, in addition to light of a desired color. Thus, the colorfilter method has a problem of low color purity of light and low lightuse efficiency, as compared with the separate coloring method.

A light-emitting device having excellent productivity is required.Furthermore, a light-emitting device having high emission efficiency isrequired. Furthermore, a light-emitting device having high light useefficiency is required. Furthermore, a light-emitting device having highcolor purity of light is required.

Thus, an object of one embodiment of the present invention is to providea light-emitting device with high emission efficiency. Another object ofone embodiment of the present invention is to provide a light-emittingdevice with low power consumption. Another object of one embodiment ofthe present invention is to provide a light-emitting device which iseasily formed in a relatively small number of steps for forming films.Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to providea light-emitting device emitting light with high color purity. Anotherobject of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide alight-emitting device with high color reproducibility. Another object ofone embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novellight-emitting device. Another object of one embodiment of the presentinvention is to provide a novel display device.

Note that the description of the above object does not disturb theexistence of other objects. In one embodiment of the present invention,there is no need to achieve all the objects. Other objects are apparentfrom and can be derived from the description of the specification andthe like.

One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting deviceincluding a plurality of light-emitting elements with differentelectrode structures from each other. The light-emitting device includesa light-emitting element with a microcavity structure and alight-emitting element without a microcavity structure.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting deviceincluding a first light-emitting element and a second light-emittingelement, where the first light-emitting element includes a firstelectrode, a second electrode, and a first light-emitting layer, wherethe second light-emitting element includes the first electrode, a thirdelectrode, and the first light-emitting layer, where the secondelectrode is formed using only a first conductive film, where the thirdelectrode includes a second conductive film and a third conductive filmover the second conductive film, where the first electrode is configuredto reflect light, where the second conductive film is configured toreflect light and transmit light, and where the first conductive filmand the third conductive film are configured to transmit light.

In the above structure, the first light-emitting element is preferablyconfigured to emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in atleast one of a blue wavelength range, a green wavelength range, a yellowwavelength range, and a red wavelength range, and the secondlight-emitting element is preferably configured to emit light having apeak of an emission spectrum in at least one of a blue wavelength range,a green wavelength range, and a red wavelength range.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting deviceincluding a first light-emitting element, a second light-emittingelement, a third light-emitting element, and a fourth light-emittingelement, where the first light-emitting element includes a firstelectrode, a second electrode, a first light-emitting layer, and asecond light-emitting layer, where the second light-emitting elementincludes the first electrode, a third electrode, the firstlight-emitting layer, and the second light-emitting layer, where thethird light-emitting element includes the first electrode, a fourthelectrode, the first light-emitting layer, and the second light-emittinglayer, where the fourth light-emitting element includes the firstelectrode, a fifth electrode, the first light-emitting layer, and thesecond light-emitting layer, where the second electrode is formed usingonly a first conductive film, where the third electrode includes asecond conductive film and a third conductive film over the secondconductive film, where the fourth electrode includes the secondconductive film and a fourth conductive film over the second conductive,where the fifth electrode includes the second conductive film and afifth conductive film over the second conductive film, where the thirdconductive film has a thicker region than the fourth conductive film,where the first electrode is configured to reflect light, where thesecond conductive film is configured to reflect light and transmitlight, and where the first conductive film, the third conductive film,the fourth conductive film, and the fifth conductive film are configuredto transmit light.

In the above structure, the fourth conductive film preferably has athicker region than the fifth conductive film, and the first conductivefilm preferably has a thicker region than the fifth conductive film.

The above structure preferably has a region where a distance between thefirst electrode and the first conductive film, a distance between thefirst electrode and the third conductive film, a distance between thefirst electrode and the fourth conductive film, and a distance betweenthe first electrode and the fifth conductive film are equal to eachother.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting deviceincluding a first light-emitting element, a second light-emittingelement, a third light-emitting element, and a fourth light-emittingelement, where the first light-emitting element includes a firstelectrode, a second electrode, a first carrier-injection layer over thesecond electrode, a first light-emitting layer, and a secondlight-emitting layer, where the second light-emitting element includesthe first electrode, a third electrode, a second carrier-injection layerover the third electrode, the first light-emitting layer, and the secondlight-emitting layer, where the third light-emitting element includesthe first electrode, the third electrode, a third carrier-injectionlayer over the third electrode, the first light-emitting layer, and thesecond light-emitting layer, where the fourth light-emitting elementincludes the first electrode, the third electrode, a fourthcarrier-injection layer over the third electrode, the firstlight-emitting layer, and the second light-emitting layer, where thesecond electrode is formed using only a first conductive film, where thethird electrode includes a second conductive film and a third conductivefilm over the second conductive film, where the second carrier-injectionlayer includes a thicker region than the third carrier-injection layer,where the first electrode is configured to reflect light, where thesecond conductive film is configured to reflect light and transmitlight, and where the first conductive film and the third conductive filmare configured to transmit light.

In the above structure, the third carrier-injection layer preferably hasa thicker region than the fourth carrier-injection layer, and a sum ofthicknesses of the first conductive film and the first carrier-injectionlayer is preferably larger than a sum of the thicknesses of the thirdconductive film and the fourth carrier-injection layer.

The above structure preferably has a region where a distance between thefirst electrode and the first carrier-injection layer, a distancebetween the first electrode and the second carrier-injection layer, adistance between the first electrode and the third carrier-injectionlayer, and a distance between the first electrode and the fourthcarrier-injection layer are equal to each other.

In the above structure, each of the first carrier-injection layer, thesecond carrier-injection layer, the third carrier-injection layer, andthe fourth carrier-injection layer preferably includes a metal oxide.

In the above structure, the first light-emitting element is preferablyconfigured to emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in atleast one of a blue wavelength range, a green wavelength range, a yellowwavelength range, and a red wavelength range, the second light-emittingelement is preferably configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in a red wavelength range, the third light-emittingelement is preferably configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in a green wavelength range, and the fourthlight-emitting element is preferably configured to emit light having apeak of an emission spectrum in a blue wavelength range.

In the above structure, the first light-emitting element, the secondlight-emitting element, the third light-emitting element, and the fourthlight-emitting element preferably include a charge-generation layerbetween the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emittinglayer.

In the above structure, the first light-emitting element, the secondlight-emitting element, the third light-emitting element, and the fourthlight-emitting element preferably include a third light-emitting layer.In addition, the above structure preferably includes a region where thesecond light-emitting layer and the third light-emitting layer are incontact with each other.

In the above structure, the second conductive film preferably includes ametal with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than orequal to 30 nm. In addition, the second conductive film preferablyincludes Ag.

In the above structure, each of the first conductive film, the thirdconductive film, the fourth conductive film, and the fifth conductivefilm preferably includes a metal oxide or organic conductor. Inaddition, each of the first conductive film, the third conductive film,the fourth conductive film, and the fifth conductive film preferablyincludes at least one of In and Zn.

In the above structure, the first electrode preferably includes a metal.The first electrode preferably includes at least one of Ag and Al.

One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting devicehaving any of the above structures, and at least one of a color filterand a transistor. Another embodiment of the present invention is anelectronic device including the display device, and at least one of ahousing and a touch sensor. One embodiment of the present invention is alighting device including the light-emitting device having any of theabove structures, and at least one of a housing and a touch sensor. Thecategory of one embodiment of the present invention includes not only alight-emitting device including a light-emitting element but also anelectronic device including a light-emitting device. Accordingly, alight-emitting device in this specification refers to an image displaydevice or a light source (including a lighting device). Thelight-emitting device may be included in a display module in which aconnector such as a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or a tape carrierpackage (TCP) is connected to a light-emitting device, a display modulein which a printed wiring board is provided on the tip of a TCP, or adisplay module in which an integrated circuit (IC) is directly mountedon a light-emitting device by a chip on glass (COG) method.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, a light-emittingdevice with high emission efficiency can be provided. With oneembodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting device with lowpower consumption can be provided. With one embodiment of the presentinvention, a light-emitting device that is easily formed in a relativelysmall number of steps for forming films can be provided. With oneembodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting device emittinglight with high color purity can be provided. With one embodiment of thepresent invention, a light-emitting device with color reproducibilitycan be provided. With one embodiment of the present invention, a novellight-emitting device can be provided. With one embodiment of thepresent invention, a novel display device can be provided.

Note that the description of these effects does not disturb theexistence of other effects. One embodiment of the present invention doesnot necessarily achieve all the effects listed above. Other effects willbe apparent from and can be derived from the description of thespecification, the drawings, the claims, and the like.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting deviceof one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional schematic views of alight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 12A to 12C are cross-sectional schematic views of a method formanufacturing a light-emitting device of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIGS. 13A to 13C are cross-sectional schematic views of a method formanufacturing a light-emitting device of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIGS. 14A and 14B are cross-sectional schematic views of alight-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention, andFIG. 14C illustrates a correlation between energy levels in alight-emitting layer.

FIG. 15A is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting elementof one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 15B illustrates acorrelation between energy levels in a light-emitting layer.

FIGS. 16A and 16B are cross-sectional schematic views of alight-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention, andFIG. 16C illustrates a correlation between energy levels in alight-emitting layer.

FIGS. 17A and 17B a top view and a cross-sectional schematic view of adisplay device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 18A and 18B are cross-sectional schematic views of a displaydevice of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a display device of oneembodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 20A to 20D are cross-sectional schematic views of a method formanufacturing an EL layer.

FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram illustrating a droplet dischargeapparatus.

FIGS. 22A and 22B are a block diagram and a circuit diagram,respectively, of a display device of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIGS. 23A and 23B are each a circuit diagram of a pixel circuit of adisplay device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 24A and 24B are each a circuit diagram of a pixel circuit of adisplay device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 25A and 25B are perspective views illustrating an example of atouch panel of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 26A to 26C are cross-sectional views illustrating examples of adisplay device and a touch sensor of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a touchpanel of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 28A and 28B are a block diagram and a timing chart of a touchsensor of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram of a touch sensor of one embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIGS. 30A and 30B illustrate a structure of a display device of oneembodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a structure of a displaydevice of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 32 illustrates a circuit of pixels of a display device of oneembodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 33A, 33B-1, and 33B-2 illustrate a structure of a display deviceof one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 34 illustrates an electronic device one embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIGS. 35A to 35G illustrate electronic devices of embodiments of thepresent invention.

FIGS. 36A to 36F illustrate electronic devices of embodiments of thepresent invention.

FIGS. 37A to 37E illustrate an electronic device of one embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIGS. 38A to 38D illustrate electronic devices of one embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIGS. 39A and 39B are perspective views of a display device of oneembodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 40A to 40C are a perspective view and cross-sectional views of alight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 41A to 41D are cross-sectional views of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 42A and 42B illustrate an electronic device of one embodiment ofthe present invention, and FIG. 42C illustrates a lighting device of oneembodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 43 illustrates lighting devices of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIGS. 44A and 44B are cross-sectional views of light-emitting elementsin Example.

FIG. 45 is a graph showing luminance-current density characteristics oflight-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 46 is a graph showing luminance-current density characteristics oflight-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 47 is a graph showing current density-voltage characteristics oflight-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 48 is a graph showing current density-voltage characteristics oflight-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 49 is a graph showing current efficiency-luminance characteristicsof light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 50 is a graph showing current efficiency-luminance characteristicsof light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 51 is a graph showing electroluminescence spectra of light-emittingelements in Example.

FIG. 52 is a graph showing electroluminescence spectra of light-emittingelements in Example.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Embodiments and an example of the present invention will be describedbelow with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention isnot limited to the following description, and the mode and details canbe variously changed unless departing from the scope and spirit of thepresent invention. Accordingly, the present invention should not beinterpreted as being limited to the content of the embodiments below.

Note that the position, the size, the range, or the like of eachstructure illustrated in the drawings and the like are not accuratelyrepresented in some cases for easy understanding. Therefore, thedisclosed invention is not necessarily limited to the position, size,range, or the like as disclosed in the drawings and the like.

Note that the ordinal numbers such as “first”, “second”, and the like inthis specification and the like are used for convenience and do notdenote the order of steps or the stacking order of layers. Therefore,for example, description can be made even when “first” is replaced with“second” or “third”, as appropriate. In addition, the ordinal numbers inthis specification and the like are not necessarily the same as thosewhich specify one embodiment of the present invention.

In the description of modes of the present invention in thisspecification and the like with reference to the drawings, the samecomponents in different diagrams are commonly denoted by the samereference numeral in some cases.

In this specification and the like, the terms “film” and “layer” can beinterchanged with each other depending on the case or circumstances. Forexample, the term “conductive layer” can be changed into the term“conductive film” in some cases. Also, the term “insulating film” can bechanged into the term “insulating layer” in some cases.

In this specification and the like, a singlet excited state refers to asinglet state having excited energy. The lowest level of the singletexcited energy level (S1 level) refers to the excited energy level ofthe lowest singlet excited state (S1 state). A triplet excited statemeans a triplet state with excited energy. The lowest level of thetriplet excited energy level (T1 level) refers to the excited energylevel of the lowest triplet excited state (T1 state). Note that in thisspecification and the like, simple expressions “singlet excited state”and “singlet excitation energy level” mean the S1 state and the S1level, respectively, in some cases. In addition, expressions “tripletexcited state” and “triplet excitation energy level” mean the T1 stateand the T1 level, respectively, in some cases.

In this specification and the like, a fluorescent material refers to amaterial that emits light in the visible light region when the singletexcited state relaxes to the ground state. A phosphorescent materialrefers to a material that emits light in the visible light region atroom temperature when the triplet excited state relaxes to the groundstate. That is, a phosphorescent material refers to a material that canconvert triplet excitation energy into visible light.

Note that in this specification and the like, “room temperature” refersto a temperature higher than or equal to 0° C. and lower than or equalto 40° C.

In general, color is defined by three aspects of hue (corresponding tothe wavelength of light of a single color), chroma (saturation, i.e.,the degree to which it differs from white), and value (brightness, i.e.,the intensity of light). In this specification and the like, color maybe defined by only one of the above three aspects or two of the aspectswhich are selected arbitrarily. In this specification, a differencebetween two colors of light means a difference in at least one of theabove three aspects and includes a difference in the shape between twospectra of light or in the distribution of the relative intensity of thepeaks between two spectra of light.

In this specification and the like, a wavelength range of blue refers toa wavelength range which is greater than or equal to 400 nm and lessthan 480 nm, and blue light has at least one peak in that wavelengthrange in an emission spectrum. A wavelength range of green refers to awavelength range which is greater than or equal to 480 nm and less than550 nm, and green light has at least one peak in that wavelength rangein an emission spectrum. A wavelength range of yellow refers to awavelength range which is greater than or equal to 550 nm and less than600 nm, and yellow light has at least one peak in that wavelength rangein an emission spectrum. A wavelength range of red refers to awavelength range which is greater than or equal to 600 nm and less thanor equal to 740 nm, and red light has at least one peak in thatwavelength range in an emission spectrum.

Embodiment 1

In this embodiment, a light-emitting device of one embodiment of thepresent invention will be described below with reference to FIG. 1, FIG.2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, FIG. 7, FIG. 8, FIG. 9, FIG. 10,FIGS. 11A and 11B, FIGS. 12A to 12C, and FIGS. 13A to 13C.

Structural Example 1 of Light-Emitting Device

First, a structure of the light-emitting device of one embodiment of thepresent invention will be described with reference to FIG. 1.

FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device150 of one embodiment of the present invention.

The light-emitting device 150 includes a light-emitting element 221W anda light-emitting element 221 over a substrate 200.

The light-emitting element 221W includes an electrode 101, an electrode102, and an EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221 includes the electrode 101, an electrode 103,and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. The electrode 102includes a conductive film, and the electrode 103 includes a conductivefilm 104 and a conductive film 106. The EL layer 100 includes at least alight-emitting layer 130.

The EL layer 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 includes functional layers suchas a hole-injection layer 111, a hole-transport layer 112, anelectron-transport layer 118, and an electron-injection layer 119, inaddition to the light-emitting layer 130.

In this embodiment, although description is given assuming that theelectrode 101 serves as a cathode and the electrode 102 and theelectrode 103 each serve as an anode, they are not limited thereto forthe structure of the light-emitting device 150. The electrode 101 servesas anode, and the electrode 102 and the electrode 103 each serve as acathode, and the layers in the EL layer 100 may be stacked in thereverse order. In other words, the hole-injection layer, thehole-transport layer, the light-emitting layer, the electron-transportlayer, and the electron-injection layer may be stacked in this orderfrom the anode side.

The structure of the EL layer 100 is not limited to the structureillustrated in FIG. 1, and a structure including at least one layerselected from the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer112, the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer119 may be employed. Alternatively, the EL layer 100 may include afunctional layer which is capable of lowering a carrier (hole orelectron) injection barrier, improving a carrier (hole orelectron)-transport property, inhibiting a carrier (hole orelectron)-transport property, or suppressing a quenching phenomenon byan electrode, for example. Note that the functional layers may each be asingle layer or stacked layers.

FIG. 1 illustrates an example in which the hole-injection layer 111, thehole-transport layer 112, the light-emitting layer 130, theelectron-transport layer 118, the electron-injection layer 119, and theelectrode 101 are independently provided for each light-emittingelement; however, the layers can be shared without being separatedbetween the light-emitting elements.

In the light-emitting device 150 of one embodiment of the presentinvention, when a voltage is applied between a pair of electrodes (theelectrodes 101 and 102) of the light-emitting element 221W and isapplied between a pair of electrodes (the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103) of the light-emitting element 221, electrons and holesare injected to the EL layer 100 from the cathode and the anode,respectively, and thus current flows. By recombination of the injectedcarriers (electrons and holes), excitons are formed. When carriers(electrons and holes) recombine and excitons are formed in thelight-emitting layer 130 including light-emitting materials, thelight-emitting materials in the light-emitting layer 130 are broughtinto an excited state, causing light emission from the light-emittingmaterials.

The light-emitting layer 130 preferably includes a light-emittingmaterial of at least one color selected from violet, blue, blue green,green, yellow green, yellow, yellow orange, orange, and red.

The light-emitting layer 130 may have a stacked structure of two layers.The two light-emitting layers each including two kinds of light-emittingmaterials (a first compound and a second compound) for emitting light ofdifferent colors enable emission of light of a plurality of colorsconcurrently. It is particularly preferable to select the light-emittingmaterials of the light-emitting layers so that white light or light ofcolor close to white can be obtained from the light-emitting layer 130.

The light-emitting layer 130 may have a stacked structure of three ormore layers, in which a layer not including a light-emitting materialmay be included.

The electrode 101 has a function of reflecting visible light. Theconductive film in the electrode 102 and the conductive film 106 eachhave a function of transmitting visible light. The conductive film 104has functions of reflecting visible light and transmitting visiblelight. Accordingly, the electrode 102 has a function of transmittingvisible light, and the electrode 103 has function of reflecting visiblelight and transmitting visible light.

Thus, light from the light-emitting element 221W and light from thelight-emitting element 221 are emitted to the outside through theelectrode 102 and the electrode 103, respectively. In other words, thelight-emitting device 150 is a bottom-emission light-emitting device.However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this,and a dual-emission light-emitting device in which light is extracted inboth top and bottom directions of the substrate 200 where thelight-emitting element is formed may be employed.

Furthermore, the light-emitting element 221 has a microcavity structure.

<<Microcavity Structure>>

Light emitted from the light-emitting layer 130 resonates between a pairof electrodes (the electrode 101 and the electrode 103). Thelight-emitting layer 130 is formed at such a position as to increase theintensity of light of a desired wavelength among light to be emitted.For example, by adjusting an optical length from a reflective region ofthe electrode 101 to the light-emitting region of the light-emittinglayer 130 and an optical length from a reflective region of theelectrode 103 to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer130, the intensity light of a desired wavelength among light emittedfrom the light-emitting layer 130 can be increased.

Note the optical length from the reflective region of the electrode 101to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 130 isrepresented by the product of the refractive index and the distance fromthe reflective region of the electrode 101 to the light-emitting regionof the light-emitting layer 130. The optical length from the reflectiveregion of the electrode 103 to the light-emitting region of thelight-emitting layer 130 is represented by the product of the refractiveindex and the distance from the reflective region of the electrode 103to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 130. Thus, inthe light-emitting element 221, the thickness of the conductive film 106is adjusted, whereby the intensity of light of a desired wavelengthamong light emitted from the light-emitting layer 130 can be increased.Note that the thickness of at least one of the hole-injection layer 111and the hole-transport layer 112 or at least one of theelectron-injection layer 119 and the electron-transport layer 118 may beadjusted to increase the intensity of light of a desired wavelengthamong the light emitted from the light-emitting layer 130.

For example, in the case where the refractive index of the conductivefilm having a function of reflecting light in the electrodes 101 and 103is lower than the refractive index of the light-emitting layer 130, thethickness of the conductive film 106 in the electrode 103 is adjusted sothat the optical length between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103is mλ/2 (m is a natural number and λ is the wavelength of lightintensified in the light-emitting element 221).

In the case where it is difficult to precisely determine the reflectiveregions of the electrodes 101 and 103, the optical length forintensifying light emitted from the light-emitting layer 130 may bederived on the assumption that certain regions of the electrodes 101 and103 are the reflective regions. In the case where it is difficult toprecisely determine the light-emitting region of the light-emittinglayer 130, the optical length for intensifying light emitted from thelight-emitting layer 130 may be derived on the assumption that certainregion of the light-emitting layer 130 is the light-emitting region.That is, in this specification and the like, “around λ” is λ±20 nm.

With a microcavity structure, the intensity of light of a desiredwavelength is increased. Thus, light emitted from the light-emittingelement 221 has a peak of an emission spectrum in a wavelength range ofany one of colors selected from violet, blue, blue green, green, yellowgreen, yellow, yellow orange, orange, and red. In the case where thelight-emitting device 150 is used in a display device, light emittedfrom the light-emitting element 221 preferably has a peak of emissionspectrum in a wavelength range of any one of blue, green, and red.

In the above manner, with the microcavity structure in which the opticallength between the pair of electrodes is adjusted, scattering andabsorption of light in the vicinity of the electrodes can be suppressed,resulting in high efficiency of extraction of light of a desiredwavelength. In addition, the intensity of light of a desired wavelengthis increased, and accordingly light emission with high color purity canbe obtained.

In contrast, the electrode 102 in the light-emitting element 221W isformed from only a conductive film having a light-transmitting function.The light-emitting element 221W has no microcavity structure, andthrough extraction of light emitted from the light-emitting layer 130 tothe outside, the intensity of light of a specific wavelength is notincreased. Thus, light in a visible light region, particularly whitelight or light of color close to white, can be extracted to the outsideefficiently. Note that white light or light of color close to whitepreferably has a peak of an emission spectrum in a wavelength range ofat least one of blue, green, yellow, and red.

Therefore, the light-emitting device 150 that includes thelight-emitting element 221 with a microcavity structure and thelight-emitting element 221W without a microcavity structure enableslight with high color purity and white light or light of color close towhite to be extracted with high light-extraction efficiency. In otherwords, with the structure of the light-emitting device 150, alight-emitting device with high color purity and high emissionefficiency can be provided.

The EL layer 100 included in the light-emitting element 221 and the ELlayer 100 included in the light-emitting element 221W can be formed inthe same step. Thus, the light-emitting device 150 is easilymanufactured.

In the above structure, a material used for a conductive film in theelectrode 102 and a material used for the conductive film 106 may be thesame or different from each other. It is preferable to use the samematerial for the conductive film in the electrode 102 and the conductivefilm 106 because patterning by etching in the formation process of theelectrode 102 and the electrode 103 can be performed easily. Each of theconductive film in the electrode 102 and the conductive film 106 mayhave a stacked-layer structure of two or more layers.

In the light-emitting device 150, a material of the electrode 101 and amaterial of the conductive film 104 may be the same or different fromeach other. In the case where the same material is used for theelectrode 101 and the conductive film 104, a manufacturing cost of thelight-emitting device 150 can be reduced. Each of the electrode 101 andthe conductive film 104 may have a stacked-layer structure of two ormore layers.

For the conductive film 104, a metal with a thickness (e.g., greaterthan or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 30 nm) through whichlight can be transmitted is preferably used. It is preferable to usesilver (Ag) or an alloy including Ag as the metal because thereflectance of the conductive film 104 can be increased, and theemission efficiency of the light-emitting element can be increased.Having a low absorptance of light in the visible light region, Ag havinga thickness that allows transmission of light is used, whereby areflective film having functions of transmitting light and reflectinglight can be formed.

When the electrode 101 is formed using a material including aluminum(Al) or silver (Ag), the reflectance of the electrode 101 can beincreased and the emission efficiency of the light-emitting element canbe increased. Note that Al is preferable because material cost is low,patterning can be easily performed, and manufacturing cost of alight-emitting element can be reduced. In addition, Ag is preferablebecause its particularly high reflectance makes it possible to increasethe emission efficiency of a light-emitting element.

For the electrode 102 and the conductive film 106, a metal oxide ispreferably used. The metal oxide preferably contains at least one ofindium (In) and zinc (Zn). With the metal oxides containing In and/orZn, conductivity and light transmittance can be improved. Moreover,manufacturing cost of the light-emitting element can be reduced with theuse of Zn for the conductive film because of a low material cost of Zn.

Note that in the case where a material containing Al is in directcontact with an oxide containing In, the material containing Al and theoxide containing In differ in ionization tendency; thus, electrons aredonated and accepted between the material and the oxide, resulting inelectrolytic corrosion between electrodes containing the material andthe oxide. Therefore, it is preferable that the material containing Albe not in direct contact with the oxide containing In. From the above,as a metal contained in the conductive film 104, Ag is particularlypreferable.

When the above-described light-emitting device 150 is used for a pixelin a display device, the display device can have high color purity andhigh emission efficiency. Thus, the display device including thelight-emitting device 150 achieves low power consumption.

Structural Example 2 of Light-Emitting Device

Next, a structural example different from that of the light-emittingdevice 150 illustrated in FIG. 1 will be described below with referenceto FIG. 2.

FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 2, a portion having afunction similar to that in FIG. 1 is represented by the same hatchpattern as in FIG. 1 and not especially denoted by a reference numeralin some cases. In addition, common reference numerals are used forportions having similar functions, and a detailed description of theportions is omitted in some cases.

A light-emitting device 152 illustrated in FIG. 2 includes, over thesubstrate 200, the light-emitting element 221W, a light-emitting element221R, a light-emitting element 221G, and a light-emitting element 221B.

The light-emitting element 221W includes the electrode 101, theelectrode 102, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221R includes the electrode 101, an electrode103R, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221G includes the electrode 101, an electrode103G, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221B includes the electrode 101, an electrode103B, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Theelectrode 102 includes a conductive film. The electrode 103R includesthe conductive film 104 and a conductive film 106R. The electrode 103Gincludes the conductive film 104 and a conductive film 106G. Theelectrode 103B includes the conductive film 104 and a conductive film106B. The EL layer 100 includes at least the light-emitting layer 130,and the light-emitting layer 130, for example, includes a light-emittinglayer 120 and a light-emitting layer 140.

The EL layer 100 illustrated in FIG. 2 includes functional layers suchas the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, theelectron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119, inaddition to the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer140.

In FIG. 2, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112,the light-emitting layer 120, the light-emitting layer 140, theelectron-transport layer 118, the electron-injection layer 119, and theelectrode 101 are independently provided for each light-emittingelement; however, they can be shared without being separated between thelight-emitting elements.

One of the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140preferably includes a light-emitting material of at least one colorselected from violet, blue, and blue green. The other of thelight-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 preferablyincludes a light-emitting material of at least one color selected fromgreen, yellow green, yellow, yellow orange, orange, and red.

Either or both of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 may have astacked structure of two layers. The two light-emitting layers eachincluding two kinds of light-emitting materials (a first compound and asecond compound) for emitting light of different colors enable emissionof light of a plurality of colors. In particular, light-emittingmaterials used for the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emittinglayer 140 are preferably selected so that light emitted from each of thelight-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 is white lightor light of color close to white.

Either or both of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 may have astacked structure of three or more layers, in which a layer notincluding a light-emitting material may be included.

The electrode 101 has a function of reflecting visible light. Theconductive film in the electrode 102, the conductive film 106R, theconductive film 106G, and the conductive film 106B each has a functionof transmitting visible light. The conductive film 104 has functions ofreflecting visible light and transmitting visible light. Thus, theelectrode 102 has a function of transmitting visible light, and each ofthe electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B hasfunctions of reflecting visible light and transmitting visible light.

Light from the light-emitting element 221W, light from thelight-emitting element 221R, light from the light-emitting element 221G,and light from the light-emitting element 221B are emitted through theelectrode 102, the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode103B, respectively, to the outside. Thus, the light-emitting device 152is a light-emitting device with a bottom-emission structure. In FIG. 2,white light or light of color close to white (W), red light (R), greenlight (G), and blue light (B) are each represented schematically bydashed arrows. The same applies to light-emitting devices describedlater. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limitedto the above light-emitting device, and may employ a light-emittingdevice with a dual emission structure in which light is extracted inboth top and bottom directions of the substrate 200 where alight-emitting element is formed.

The light-emitting element 221W has no microcavity structure, and eachof the light-emitting element 221R, the light-emitting element 221G, andthe light-emitting element 221B has a microcavity structure.

In the light-emitting element 221R, it is preferable to adjust adistance between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103R so that lightin a red wavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure.In the light-emitting element 221G, it is preferable to adjust adistance between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103G so that lightin a green wavelength range is intensified with the microcavitystructure. In the light-emitting element 221B, it is preferable toadjust a distance between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103B sothat light in a blue wavelength range is intensified with themicrocavity structure.

The thickness of the conductive film 106R is adjusted in thelight-emitting element 221R, the thickness of the conductive film 106Gis adjusted in the light-emitting element 221G, and the thickness of theconductive film 106B is adjusted in the light-emitting element 221B,which makes it possible to increase the intensity of light of a desiredwavelength among light emitted from the light-emitting layer 120 and thelight-emitting layer 140 in each light-emitting element.

The conductive film 106R, the conductive film 106G, and the conductivefilm 106B have different thicknesses from each other. For example, inthe case where the refractive index of the conductive film having afunction of reflecting light is smaller than those of the light-emittinglayer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 in each of the electrode 101,the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B, thethickness of the conductive film in each light-emitting element isadjusted. Specifically, the thickness of the conductive film 106R in theelectrode 103R is adjusted so that the optical length between theelectrode 101 and the electrode 103R is around m_(RλR)/2 (m_(R)represents a natural number, and λ_(R) represents a wavelength of lightintensified in the light-emitting element 221R). The thickness of theconductive film 106G in the electrode 103G is adjusted so that theoptical length between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103G isaround m_(GλG)/2 (m_(G) represents a natural number, and λ_(G)represents a wavelength of light intensified in the light-emittingelement 221G). The thickness of the conductive film 106B in theelectrode 103B is adjusted so that the optical length between theelectrode 101 and the electrode 103B is around m_(BλB)/2 (m_(B)represents a natural number, and λ_(B) represents a wavelength of lightintensified in the light-emitting element 221B).

With the microcavity structures, light emitted from the light-emittingelement 221R has a peak of an emission spectrum in a red wavelengthrange, light emitted from the light-emitting element 221G has a peak ofan emission spectrum in a green wavelength range, and light emitted fromthe light-emitting element 221B has a peak of an emission spectrum in ablue wavelength range.

In the above manner, with the microcavity structure, in which theoptical length between the pair of electrodes in the respective regionsis adjusted, scattering and absorption of light in the vicinity of theelectrodes can be suppressed, resulting in high efficiency of extractionof light of a desired wavelength. In addition, the intensity of light ofa desired wavelength is increased, and accordingly light emission withhigh color purity can be obtained.

In contrast, the electrode 102 in the light-emitting element 221W isformed from only a conductive film having a light-transmitting function.The light-emitting element 221W has no microcavity structure, andthrough extraction of light emitted from the light-emitting layer 120and the light-emitting layer 140 to the outside, the intensity of lightof a specific wavelength is not increased. Thus, light in a visiblelight region, particularly white light or light of color close to white,can be extracted to the outside efficiently. Note that white light orlight of color close to white preferably has a peak of an emissionspectrum in a wavelength range of at least one of blue, green, yellow,and red.

Therefore, the light-emitting device 152 that includes light-emittingelements 221R, 221G, and 221B with the microcavity structures and thelight-emitting element 221W without a microcavity structure enablesextraction of light with high color purity and white light or light ofcolor close to white with high light-extraction efficiency. In otherwords, with the structure of the light-emitting device 152, alight-emitting device with high color purity and high emissionefficiency can be provided.

The EL layer 100 included in the light-emitting element 221R, the ELlayer 100 included in the light-emitting element 221G, the EL layer 100included in the light-emitting element 221B, and the EL layer 100included in the light-emitting element 221W can be formed in the samestep. Thus, the light-emitting device 152 is a light-emitting devicethat is easily manufactured.

In the above structure, a material used for the conductive film in theelectrode 102 and materials used for the conductive films 106R, 106G,and 106B may be the same material or different from each other. It ispreferable to use the same material for the conductive film in theelectrode 102 and the conductive films 106R, 106G, and 106B becausepatterning by etching in the formation process of the electrode 102, theelectrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B can beperformed easily. Each of the conductive film in the electrode 102 andthe conductive films 106R, 106G, and 106B may have a stacked-layerstructure of two or more layers.

In the light-emitting device 152, a material of the electrode 101 and amaterial of the conductive film 104 may be the same or different fromeach other. In the case where the same material is used for theelectrode 101 and the conductive film 104, a manufacturing cost of thelight-emitting device 152 can be reduced. Each of the electrode 101 andthe conductive film 104 may have a stacked-layer structure of two ormore layers.

When the above-described light-emitting device 152 is used for a pixelin a display device, the display device can have high color purity andhigh emission efficiency. Thus, the display device including thelight-emitting device 152 achieves low power consumption.

Note that the structure of the light-emitting device 150 may be referredto for the other part in the light-emitting device 152.

Structural Example 3 of Light-Emitting Device

Next, a structural example different from that of the light-emittingdevice 152 illustrated in FIG. 2 will be described below with referenceto FIG. 3 and FIG. 4.

FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 are each a cross-sectional schematic view of alight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 3 and FIG. 4, a portion having a function similar to that in FIG. 1and FIG. 2 is represented by the same hatch pattern as in FIG. 1 andFIG. 2 and not especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases.In addition, common reference numerals are used for portions havingsimilar functions, and a detailed description of the portions is omittedin some cases.

Each of a light-emitting device 154 illustrated in FIG. 3 and alight-emitting device 156 illustrated in FIG. 4 includes, over thesubstrate 200, the light-emitting element 221W, the light-emittingelement 221R, the light-emitting element 221G, and the light-emittingelement 221B.

The light-emitting element 221W includes the electrode 101, theelectrode 102, and a plurality of light-emitting units (a light-emittingunit 208 and a light-emitting unit 210) provided between the electrodes.The light-emitting element 221R includes the electrode 101, theelectrode 103R, and the plurality of light-emitting units (thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210) providedbetween the electrodes. The light-emitting element 221G includes theelectrode 101, the electrode 103G, and the plurality of light-emittingunits (the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210)provided between the electrodes. The light-emitting element 221Bincludes the electrode 101, the electrode 103B, and the plurality oflight-emitting units (the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emittingunit 210) provided between the electrodes. Any one of the light-emittingunits preferably has the same structure as the EL layer 100. Theelectrode 102 includes a conductive film having a function oftransmitting visible light. The electrode 103R includes the conductivefilm 104 having functions of reflecting visible light and transmittingvisible light and the conductive film 106R having a function oftransmitting visible light. The electrode 103G includes the conductivefilm 104 having functions of reflecting visible light and transmittingvisible light and the conductive film 106G having a function oftransmitting visible light. The electrode 103B includes the conductivefilm 104 having functions of reflecting visible light and transmittingvisible light and the conductive film 106B having a function oftransmitting visible light.

In each of the light-emitting device 154 and the light-emitting device156, the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210 arestacked, and a charge-generation layer 115 is provided between thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210.

The light-emitting unit 208 includes the light-emitting layer 120, andthe light-emitting unit 210 includes the light-emitting layer 140. Thelight-emitting unit 208 includes the hole-injection layer 111, thehole-transport layer 112, an electron-transport layer 113, and anelectron-injection layer 114 in addition to the light-emitting layer120. The light-emitting unit 210 includes a hole-injection layer 116, ahole-transport layer 117, the electron-transport layer 118, and theelectron-injection layer 119 in addition to the light-emitting layer140.

The charge-generation layer 115 provided between the light-emitting unit208 and the light-emitting unit 210 may have any structure as long aselectrons can be injected to the light-emitting unit on one side andholes can be injected into the light-emitting unit on the other sidewhen a voltage is applied between the electrode 101 and the electrode102. For example, in FIG. 3, the charge-generation layer 115 injectselectrons into the light-emitting unit 208 and holes into thelight-emitting unit 210 when a voltage is applied such that thepotential of the electrode 101 is higher than that of the electrode 102.

Note that when a surface of a light-emitting unit on the anode side isin contact with the charge-generation layer 115 like the light-emittingunit 210, the charge-generation layer 115 can also serve as ahole-injection layer or a hole-transport layer of the light-emittingunit; thus, a hole-injection layer or a hole-transport layer need not beincluded in the light-emitting unit. When a surface of a light-emittingunit on the cathode side is in contact with the charge-generation layer115 like the light-emitting unit 208, the charge-generation layer 115can also serve as an electron-injection layer or an electron-transportlayer of the light-emitting unit; thus, an electron-injection layer oran electron-transport layer need not be included in the light-emittingunit.

The light-emitting element having two light-emitting units has beendescribed with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4; however, a similarstructure can be applied to a light-emitting element in which three ormore light-emitting units are stacked. With a plurality oflight-emitting units partitioned by the charge-generation layer betweena pair of electrodes as in the light-emitting device 154 and thelight-emitting device 156, it is possible to provide a light-emittingelement which can emit light with high luminance with the currentdensity kept low and has a long lifetime. In addition, a light-emittingelement with low power consumption can be achieved.

Note that the electrode 101, the electrode 102, the electrode 103R, theelectrode 103G, the electrode 103B, the hole-injection layers 111 and116, the hole-transport layers 112 and 117, the light-emitting layers120 and 140, the electron-transport layers 113 and 118, and theelectron-injection layers 114 and 119 in each of the light-emittingdevice 154 and the light-emitting device 156 have functions similar tothose of the electrode 101, the electrode 102, the electrode 103R, theelectrode 103G, the electrode 103B, the hole-injection layer 111, thehole-transport layer 112, the light-emitting layers 120 and 140, theelectron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 inthe light-emitting device 152, respectively. Therefore, the detaileddescription of the above components is omitted.

The light-emitting element 221W is a light-emitting element without amicrocavity structure, and the light-emitting element 221R, thelight-emitting element 221G, and the light-emitting element 221B areeach a light-emitting element with a microcavity structure.

In the light-emitting element 221R, it is preferable to adjust adistance between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103R so that lightin a red wavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure.In the light-emitting element 221G, it is preferable to adjust adistance between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103G so that lightin a green wavelength range is intensified with the microcavitystructure. In the light-emitting element 221B, it is preferable toadjust a distance between the electrode 101 and the electrode 103B sothat light in a blue wavelength range is intensified with themicrocavity structure. At this time, as the light-emitting device 154illustrated in FIG. 3, the conductive film 106R preferably has a regionthicker than that in the conductive film 106G, and the conductive film106G preferably has a region thicker than that in the conductive film106B. Alternatively, as the light-emitting device 156 illustrated inFIG. 4, the conductive film 106R preferably has a region thicker thanthat in the conductive film 106G, and the conductive film 106Bpreferably has a region thicker than that in the conductive film 106R.When in the light-emitting element 221B, the optical length between theelectrode 101 and the electrode 103B is around m_(BλB)/2 (m_(B) is anatural number greater than 2) and the conductive film 106B has a largethickness, it is possible to suppress an influence of a phenomenon wherethe light extraction efficiency is reduced by light scattering orabsorption in the vicinity of a surface of the conductive film 104 (thephenomenon is referred to as surface plasmon resonance: SPR). That is, ahigh efficiency of light extraction can be achieved. Thus, blue lightcan be extracted efficiently from the light-emitting element 221B.

Each of the light-emitting device 154 and the light-emitting device 156that includes the light-emitting elements 221R, 221G, and 221B eachhaving a microcavity structure and the light-emitting element 221Wwithout a microcavity structure enables extraction of light with highcolor purity and white light or light of a color close to white withhigh light-extraction efficiency. Thus, with the structures of thelight-emitting device 154 and the light-emitting device 156, alight-emitting device with high color purity and high emissionefficiency can be provided.

Note that the structure of the light-emitting device 150 or 152 may bereferred to for the other part in the light-emitting devices 154 and156.

Structural Example 4 of Light-Emitting Device

Next, a structural example different from that of the light-emittingdevice 152 illustrated in FIG. 2 will be described below with referenceto FIG. 5.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting device ofone embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 5, a portion having afunction similar to that in FIG. 1, FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 isrepresented by the same hatch pattern as in FIG. 1, FIG. 2, FIG. 3, andFIG. 4 and not especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases.In addition, common reference numerals are used for portions havingsimilar functions, and a detailed description of the portions is omittedin some cases.

A light-emitting device 158 illustrated in FIG. 5 includes, over thesubstrate 200, the light-emitting element 221W, the light-emittingelement 221R, the light-emitting element 221G, and the light-emittingelement 221B.

The light-emitting element 221W includes the electrode 101, theelectrode 102, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221R includes the electrode 101, the electrode103, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221G includes the electrode 101, the electrode103, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. Thelight-emitting element 221B includes the electrode 101, the electrode103, and the EL layer 100 provided between the electrodes. The electrode102 includes a conductive film having a function of transmitting visiblelight. The electrode 103 includes the conductive film 104 havingfunctions of reflecting visible light and transmitting visible light andthe conductive film 106 having a function of transmitting visible light.The EL layer 100 includes at least the light-emitting layer 130, and thelight-emitting layer 130 includes, for example, the light-emitting layer120 and the light-emitting layer 140.

The EL layer 100 illustrated in FIG. 5 includes functional layers suchas the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, theelectron-transport layer 118, the electron-injection layer 119, inaddition to the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer140.

The electrode 101, the electrode 102, the conductive film 104, thehole-transport layer 112, the light-emitting layer 120, thelight-emitting layer 140, the electron-transport layer 118, and theelectron-injection layer 119 in the light-emitting device 158 havefunctions similar to those of the electrode 101, the electrode 102, theconductive film 104, the hole-transport layer 112, the light-emittinglayer 120, the light-emitting layer 140, the electron-transport layer118, and the electron-injection layer 119 in the light-emitting device152, respectively. Thus, the detailed description of the abovecomponents is omitted.

The EL layer 100 in the light-emitting element 221W includes thehole-injection layer 111. The EL layer 100 in the light-emitting element221R includes a hole-injection layer 111R. The EL layer 100 in thelight-emitting element 221G includes a hole-injection layer 111G. The ELlayer 100 in the light-emitting element 221B includes a hole-injectionlayer 111B.

The light-emitting element 221W is a light-emitting element without amicrocavity structure. The light-emitting element 221R, thelight-emitting element 221G, and the light-emitting element 221B areeach a light-emitting element with a microcavity structure.

It is preferable to adjust a distance between the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103 in the light-emitting element 221R so that light in a redwavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure. It ispreferable to adjust a distance between the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103 in the light-emitting element 221G so that light in agreen wavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure. Itis preferable to adjust a distance between the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103 in the light-emitting element 221B so that light in a bluewavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure. Thethickness of the hole-injection layer 111R is adjusted in thelight-emitting element 221R, the thickness of the hole-injection layer111G is adjusted in the light-emitting element 221G, and the thicknessof the hole-injection layer 111B is adjusted in the light-emittingelement 221B, whereby each of the light-emitting element enables theintensity of light of a desired wavelength among light emitted from thelight-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 to beincreased. The hole-injection layer 111R, the hole-injection layer 111G,and the hole-injection layer 111B may have different thicknesses fromeach other. For example, in the case where the conductive film having afunction of reflective light in the electrodes 101 and 103 has smallerrefractive index than the light-emitting layer 120 and thelight-emitting layer 140, the thicknesses of the hole-injection layersare adjusted. Specifically, the thickness of the hole-injection layer111R is adjusted so that the optical length between the electrode 101and the electrode 103 becomes around m_(RλR)/2 (m_(R) is a naturalnumber and λ_(R) represents a wavelength of light intensified in thelight-emitting element 221R). The thickness of the hole-injection layer111G is adjusted so that the optical length between the electrode 101and the electrode 103 becomes around m_(GλG)/2 (m_(G) is a naturalnumber and λ_(G) represents a wavelength of light intensified in thelight-emitting element 221G). The thickness of the hole-injection layer111B is adjusted so that the optical length between the electrode 101and the electrode 103 becomes around m_(BλG)/2 (m_(B) is a naturalnumber and λ_(B) represents a wavelength of light intensified in thelight-emitting element 221B).

With use of the microcavity structures, light emitted from thelight-emitting element 221R has a peak of an emission spectrum in thered wavelength range, light emitted from the light-emitting element 221Ghas a peak of an emission spectrum in the green wavelength range, andlight emitted from the light-emitting element 221B has a peak of anemission spectrum in the blue wavelength range.

The light-emitting device 158 that includes the light-emitting elements221R, 221G, and 221B each having a microcavity structure and thelight-emitting element 221W without a microcavity structure enablesextraction of light with high color purity and white light or light of acolor close to white with high light-extraction efficiency. Thus, withthe structure of the light-emitting device 158, a light-emitting devicewith high color purity and high emission efficiency can be provided.

In the above structure, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-injectionlayer 111R, the hole-injection layer 111G, and the hole-injection layer111B may be formed using the same material or different materials. Inthe case where the same material is used for the hole-injection layers,the manufacturing cost of the light-emitting device 158 can be reduced.Note that one or a plurality of these hole-injection layers may have astacked structure including two or more layers.

Note that the structure of the light-emitting device 150 or thelight-emitting device 152 may be referred to for the other part in thelight-emitting device 158.

Structural Example 5 of Light-Emitting Device

Next, a structural example different from that of the light-emittingdevice 158 in FIG. 5 will be described below with reference to FIG. 6and FIG. 7.

FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 are each a cross-sectional schematic view of alight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 6 and FIG. 7, a portion having a function similar to that in FIGS.1 to 5 is represented by the same hatch pattern as in FIGS. 1 to 5 andnot especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases. Inaddition, common reference numerals are used for portions having similarfunctions, and a detailed description of the portions is omitted in somecases.

A light-emitting device 160 illustrated in FIG. 6 and a light-emittingdevice 162 illustrated in FIG. 7 each include, over the substrate 200,the light-emitting element 221W, the light-emitting element 221R, thelight-emitting element 221G, and the light-emitting element 221B.

The light-emitting element 221W includes the electrode 101, theelectrode 102, and a plurality of light-emitting units (thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210) providedbetween the electrodes. The light-emitting element 221R includes theelectrode 101, the electrode 103, and a plurality of light-emittingunits (the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210)provided between the electrodes. The light-emitting element 221Gincludes the electrode 101, the electrode 103, and a plurality oflight-emitting units (the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emittingunit 210) provided between the electrodes. The light-emitting element221B includes the electrode 101, the electrode 103, and a plurality oflight-emitting units (the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emittingunit 210) provided between the electrodes. The electrode 102 includes aconductive film having a function of transmitting visible light. Theelectrode 103 includes the conductive film 104 having functions ofreflecting visible light and transmitting visible light and theconductive film 106 having a function of transmitting visible light.

In each of the light-emitting device 160 and the light-emitting device162, the light-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210 arestacked, and the charge-generation layer 115 is provided between thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210.

The light-emitting unit 208 includes the light-emitting layer 120, andthe light-emitting unit 210 includes the light-emitting layer 140. Thelight-emitting unit 208 includes the hole-injection layer 111, thehole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 113, and theelectron-injection layer 114 in addition to the light-emitting layer120. The light-emitting unit 210 includes the hole-injection layer 116,the hole-transport layer 117, the electron-transport layer 118, and theelectron-injection layer 119 in addition to the light-emitting layer140.

The electrode 101, the electrode 102, the electrode 103, thehole-transport layers 112 and 117, the light-emitting layer 120, thelight-emitting layer 140, and the electron-transport layers 113 and 118,and the electron-injection layers 114 and 119 in each of thelight-emitting device 160 and the light-emitting device 162 havefunctions similar to those of the electrode 101, the electrode 102, theelectrode 103, the hole-transport layer 112, the light-emitting layer120, the light-emitting layer 140, the electron-transport layer 118, andthe electron-injection layer 119 in the light-emitting device 158. Thus,the detailed description of the above components is omitted.

The light-emitting element 221W is a light-emitting element without amicrocavity structure, and each of the light-emitting element 221R, thelight-emitting element 221G, and the light-emitting element 221B is alight-emitting element with a microcavity structure.

It is preferable to adjust a distance between the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103 in the light-emitting element 221R so that light in a redwavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure. It ispreferable to adjust a distance between the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103 in the light-emitting element 221G so that light in agreen wavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure. Itis preferable to adjust a distance between the electrode 101 and theelectrode 103 in the light-emitting element 221B so that light in a bluewavelength range is intensified with the microcavity structure. At thistime, as the light-emitting device 160 illustrated in FIG. 6, thehole-injection layer 111R preferably has a region thicker than that inthe hole-injection layer 111G, and the hole-injection layer 111Gpreferably has a region thicker than that in the hole-injection layer111B. Alternatively, as the light-emitting device 162 illustrated inFIG. 7, the hole-injection layer 111R preferably has a region thickerthan that in the hole-injection layer 111G, and the hole-injection layer111B preferably has a region thicker than that in the hole-injectionlayer 111R. When in the light-emitting element 221B, the optical lengthbetween the electrode 101 and the electrode 103 is around m_(BλB)/2(m_(B) is a natural number greater than 2) and the hole-injection layer111B has a large thickness, it is possible to suppress an influence of aphenomenon where the light extraction efficiency is reduced by lightscattering or absorption in the vicinity of a surface of the conductivefilm 104 (the phenomenon is referred to as surface plasmon resonance).That is, a high efficiency of light extraction can be achieved. Thus,blue light can be extracted efficiently from the light-emitting element221B.

With use of the microcavity structures, light emitted from thelight-emitting element 221R has a peak of an emission spectrum in thered wavelength range, light emitted from the light-emitting element 221Ghas a peak of an emission spectrum in the green wavelength range, andlight emitted from the light-emitting element 221B has a peak of anemission spectrum in the blue wavelength range.

Each of the light-emitting devices 160 and 162 that include thelight-emitting elements 221R, 221G, and 221B each having a microcavitystructure and the light-emitting element 221W without a microcavitystructure enables extraction of light with high color purity and whitelight or light of a color close to white with high light-extractionefficiency. Thus, with the structures of the light-emitting devices 160and 162, a light-emitting device with high color purity and highemission efficiency can be provided.

In the above structure, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-injectionlayer 111R, the hole-injection layer 111G, and the hole-injection layer111B may be formed using the same material or different materials. Inthe case where the same material is used for the hole-injection layers,the manufacturing cost of the light-emitting devices 160 and 162 can bereduced. Note that one or a plurality of these hole-injection layers mayhave a stacked structure including two or more layers.

Note that the structures of the light-emitting device 154, 156, or 158may be referred to for the other part in the light-emitting devices 160and 162.

Structural Example 6 of Light-Emitting Device

Next, a structural example different from that of the light-emittingdevice 154 illustrated in FIG. 3 is described below with reference toFIG. 8. FIG. 9, and FIG. 10.

FIG. 8, FIG. 9, and FIG. 10 are each a cross-sectional schematic view ofa light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention. InFIG. 8, FIG. 9, and FIG. 10, a portion having a function similar to thatin FIGS. 1 to 7 is represented by the same hatch pattern as in FIGS. 1to 7 and not especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases. Inaddition, common reference numerals are used for portions having similarfunctions, and a detailed description of the portions is omitted in somecases.

A light-emitting device 250 in FIG. 8, a light-emitting device 252 inFIG. 9, and a light-emitting device 254 in FIG. 10 each include, overthe substrate 200, a light-emitting element 222W, a light-emittingelement 222R, a light-emitting element 222G, and a light-emittingelement 222B.

The light-emitting element 222W includes the electrode 101, theelectrode 102, and a plurality of light-emitting units between theelectrodes. The light-emitting element 222R includes the electrode 101,the electrode 103R, and a plurality of light-emitting units between theelectrodes. The light-emitting element 221G includes the electrode 101,the electrode 103G, and a plurality of light-emitting units between theelectrodes. The light-emitting element 221B includes the electrode 101,the electrode 103B, and a plurality of light-emitting units between theelectrodes.

Each of the light-emitting device 250, the light-emitting device 252,and the light-emitting device 254 includes the light-emitting layer 120and the light-emitting layer 140. In addition to the light-emittinglayer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140, each of the light-emittingdevice 250, the light-emitting device 252, and the light-emitting device254 includes the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112,the electron-transport layer 113, the electron-injection layer 114, thecharge-generation layer 115, the hole-injection layer 116, thehole-transport layer 117, the electron-transport layer 118, and theelectron-injection layer 119.

The light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 120 andthe light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 140preferably emit different colors of light from each other. Either orboth of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 may have a stackedstructure of two layers like light-emitting layers 140 a and 140 b, forexample. The two light-emitting layers including two kinds oflight-emitting materials for emitting different colors of light enablelight emissions of a plurality of colors at the same time. It isparticularly preferable to select the light-emitting materials of thelight-emitting layers so that white light or light of color close towhite can be obtained by combining light emissions from thelight-emitting layers 120 and 140. Either or both of the light-emittinglayers 120 and 140 may have a stacked structure of three or more layers,in which a layer not including a light-emitting material may beincluded.

The electrode 102 includes a conductive film.

The electrode 103R includes a conductive film 108, the conductive film104 in contact with a top surface of the conductive film 108, and theconductive film 106R in contact with a top surface of the conductivefilm 104. The electrode 103G includes the conductive film 108, theconductive film 104 in contact with a top surface of the conductive film108, and the conductive film 106G in contact with a top surface of theconductive film 104. The electrode 103B includes the conductive film108, the conductive film 104 in contact with a top surface of theconductive film 108, and the conductive film 106B in contact with a topsurface of the conductive film 104.

Each of the light-emitting device 250, the light-emitting device 252,and the light-emitting device 254 has a bottom-emission structure. Thus,each of the electrode 102, the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, andthe electrode 103B preferably has a function of transmitting light, andthe electrode 101 has a function of reflecting light.

Each of the light-emitting device 250, the light-emitting device 252,and the light-emitting device 254 includes a partition wall 145 providedbetween the light-emitting element 222W, the light-emitting element222R, the light-emitting element 222G, and the light-emitting element222B. The partition wall 145 has an insulating property. The partitionwall 145 covers end portions of the electrode 102, the electrode 103R,the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B and has openings to overlapwith the electrodes. With the partition wall 145, the electrodesprovided over the substrate 200 can be separated into island shapes likethe electrodes 102, 103R, 103G, and 103B.

The partition wall 145 has an insulating property and is formed using aninorganic or organic material. Examples of the inorganic materialinclude silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide,silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, and aluminum nitride. Examples of theorganic material include photosensitive resin materials such as anacrylic resin and a polyimide resin.

Note that a silicon oxynitride film refers to a film in which theproportion of oxygen is higher than that of nitrogen. The siliconoxynitride film preferably contains oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, andhydrogen in the ranges of 55 atomic % to 65 atomic %, 1 atomic % to 20atomic %, 25 atomic % to 35 atomic %, and 0.1 atomic % to 10 atomic %,respectively. A silicon nitride oxide film refers to a film in which theproportion of nitrogen is higher than that of oxygen. The siliconnitride oxide film preferably contains nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, andhydrogen in the ranges of 55 atomic % to 65 atomic %, 1 atomic % to 20atomic %, 25 atomic % to 35 atomic %, and 0.1 atomic % to 10 atomic %,respectively.

When the light-emitting layer 120 includes a light-emitting materialhaving a peak of an emission spectrum in a wavelength range of at leastone color selected from violet, blue, and blue green, the light-emittingelement 222B can emit blue light. When the light-emitting layer 140includes a light-emitting material having a peak of an emission spectrumin a wavelength range of at least one color selected from green, yellowgreen, yellow, yellow orange, orange, and red, the light-emittingelement 222G can emit green light, and the light-emitting element 222Rcan emit red light. The light-emitting device 250, 252, or 254 havingsuch a structure is used in a pixel of a display device, whereby afull-color display device can be fabricated. Note that the thicknessesof the light-emitting layers may be the same or different.

The light-emitting device 250 includes a substrate 220 provided withoptical elements 224R, 224G, and 224B in the direction where lightemitted from the light-emitting elements 222R, 222G, and 222B isextracted. The light emitted from each light-emitting element is emittedoutside the light-emitting device through each optical element. In otherwords, the light from the light-emitting element 222R, the light fromthe light-emitting element 222G, and the light from the light-emittingelement 222B are emitted through the optical element 224R, the opticalelement 224G, and the optical element 224B, respectively.

The optical elements 224R, 224G, and 224B each have a function ofselectively transmitting light of a specific color out of incidentlight. For example, the light emitted from the light-emitting element222R through the optical element 224R is red light, the light emittedfrom the light-emitting element 222G through the optical element 224G isgreen light, and the light emitted from the light-emitting element 222Bthrough the optical element 224B is blue light.

For example, a coloring layer (also referred to as color filter), a bandpass filter, a multilayer filter, or the like can be used for theoptical elements 224R, 224G, and 224B. Alternatively, color conversionelements can be used as the optical elements. A color conversion elementis an optical element that converts incident light into light having alonger wavelength than the incident light. As the color conversionelements, quantum-dot elements can be favorably used. The usage of thequantum dot can increase color reproducibility and color purity of thedisplay device.

A plurality of optical elements may also be stacked over each of theoptical elements 224R, 224G, and 224B. As another optical element, acircularly polarizing plate, an anti-reflective film, or the like can beprovided, for example. A circularly polarizing plate provided on theside where light emitted from the light-emitting device of the displaydevice is extracted can prevent a phenomenon in which light from theoutside of the display device is reflected inside the display device andreturned to the outside. An anti-reflective film can weaken externallight reflected by a surface of the display device. This leads to clearobservation of light emitted from the display device.

As the light-emitting device 252 illustrated in FIG. 9, the opticalelement 224B is not necessarily provided. With a structure without theoptical element 224B, the light extraction efficiency from thelight-emitting element 222B can be increased. Note that thelight-emitting element 222B has a microcavity structure as describedlater. Thus, among light emitted from the light-emitting element 222B,the intensity of light of a specific wavelength is increased, and thecolor purity of the light is high enough even in the structure withoutthe optical element 224B.

As the light-emitting device 254 illustrated in FIG. 10, an opticalelement 224W may be provided in the direction where light emitted fromthe light-emitting element 222W is extracted. The light emitted from thelight-emitting element 222W is emitted outside the light-emitting devicethrough the optical element 224W. With the optical element 224W, lightfrom the light-emitting element 222W can be close to white light orlight of a desired color. In addition, the contrast ratio of thelight-emitting device can be increased.

In FIG. 8, FIG. 9, and FIG. 10, light emitted from the light-emittingelements (white light or light of color close to white (W), red light(R), and green light (G), and blue light (B)) is schematically denotedby arrows of dashed lines.

A light-blocking layer 223 is provided between the optical elements. Thelight-blocking layer 223 has a function of blocking light emitted fromthe adjacent regions. Note that a structure without the light-blockinglayer 223 may also be employed.

The light-blocking layer 223 has a function of reducing the reflectionof external light. The light-blocking layer 223 has a function ofpreventing mixture of light emitted from an adjacent light-emittingdevice. As the light-blocking layer 223, a metal, a resin containingblack pigment, carbon black, a metal oxide, a composite oxide containinga solid solution of a plurality of metal oxides, or the like can beused.

The light-emitting element 222W is preferably a light-emitting elementwithout a microcavity structure, and each of the light-emitting element222R, the light-emitting element 222G, and the light-emitting element222B is preferably a light-emitting element with a microcavitystructure.

Light emitted from the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emittinglayer 140 resonates between a pair of electrodes (e.g., the electrode101 and the electrode 103R). The light-emitting layer 120 and thelight-emitting layer 140 are formed at such a position as to increasethe intensity of light of a desired wavelength among light to beemitted. For example, by adjusting the optical length from a reflectiveregion of the electrode 101 to the light-emitting region of thelight-emitting layer 120 and the optical length from a reflective regionof the electrode 103B to the light-emitting region of the light-emittinglayer 120, the intensity of light emitted from the light-emitting layer120 can be increased. Furthermore, by adjusting the optical length froma reflective region of the electrode 103G or the electrode 103R to thelight-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 140 and the opticallength from a reflective region of the electrode 101 to thelight-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 140, the intensity oflight emitted from the light-emitting layer 140 can be increased. In thecase of a light-emitting device in which a plurality of light-emittinglayers (here, the light-emitting layers 120 and 140) are stacked, eachof the optical lengths of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 ispreferably optimized.

For example, in the case where the refractive indexes of the conductivefilms having a function of reflecting light in the electrodes 101, 103R,103G, and 103B are lower than the refractive index of the light-emittinglayer 120 or 140, the thickness of the conductive film 106R in theelectrode 103R is adjusted so that the optical length between theelectrode 101 and the electrode 103R is m_(RλR)/2 (m_(R) is a naturalnumber and λ_(R) is a wavelength of light intensified in thelight-emitting element 222R). Similarly, the thickness of the conductivefilm 106G in the electrode 103G is adjusted so that the optical lengthbetween the electrode 103G and the electrode 101 is m_(GλG)/2 (m_(G) isa natural number and λ_(G) is the wavelength of light intensified in thelight-emitting element 222G). Furthermore, the thickness of theconductive film 106B in the electrode 103B is adjusted so that theoptical length between the electrode 103B and the electrode 101 ism_(BλB)/2 (m_(B) is a natural number and λ_(B) is a wavelength of lightintensified in the light-emitting element 222B).

In the above-described structure, the wavelength of the intensifiedlight differs among the light-emitting element 222R, the light-emittingelement 222G, and the light-emitting element 222B and accordingly theoptical length differs among the light-emitting elements.

With the microcavity structure, light emitted from the light-emittingelement 222R has a peak of an emission spectrum in the red wavelengthrange, light emitted from the light-emitting element 222G has a peak ofan emission spectrum in the green wavelength range, and light emittedfrom the light-emitting element 222B has a peak of an emission spectrumin the blue wavelength range.

In the above manner, with the microcavity structure in which the opticallength between the pair of electrodes in the respective light-emittingelements is adjusted, scattering and absorption of light in the vicinityof the electrodes can be suppressed, resulting in high extraction oflight of a desired wavelength. Furthermore, the intensity of light of adesired wavelength is increased, and this light emission with high colorpurity can be obtained.

Each of the light-emitting devices 250, 252, and 254 that includes thelight-emitting elements 222R, 222G, and 222B each having a microcavitystructure and the light-emitting element 222W without a microcavitystructure enables light with high color purity and white light or lightof a color close to white to be extracted with high light-extractionefficiency. Thus, with the structure of the light-emitting device 250,252, or 254, a light-emitting device with high color purity and highemission efficiency can be provided.

In the above structure, the conductive film in the electrode 102, theconductive film 106R, the conductive film 106G, and the conductive film106B preferably have a function of transmitting light. In addition, theconductive film in the electrode 102 and the conductive films 106R,106G, and 106B may be formed using the same material or differentmaterials.

In addition, it is preferable that the conductive film 104 havefunctions of transmitting light and reflecting light. Moreover, it ispreferable that the electrode 101 have a function of reflecting light.

The conductive film 108 may be formed using the same material as or adifferent material from that of the conductive film 106R, 106G, or 106B.It is preferable that the conductive films 108, 106R, 106G, and 106B beformed using the same material and the electrodes 103R, 103G, and 103Bbe formed using the same conductive material because the formation of apattern in the etching step can be easily performed. In addition, themanufacturing costs of the light-emitting devices 250, 252, and 254 canbe reduced. The conductive film 108 may have a stacked structureincluding two or more layers.

Note that each of the light-emitting devices 250, 252, and 254 is notnecessarily provided with the conductive film 108.

When the above-described light-emitting devices 250, 252, and 254 areused for pixels in a display device, the display device can have highcolor purity and high emission efficiency. In other words, a displaydevice including the light-emitting device 250, 252 or 254 can have lowpower consumption.

Note that the structures of the light-emitting devices 150, 152, 154 and156 may be referred to for the other part in the light-emitting devices250, 252, and 254.

Structural Example 7 of Light-Emitting Device

Next, structural examples different from that of the light-emittingdevice 250 illustrated in FIG. 8 will be described below with referenceto FIGS. 11A and 11B.

FIG. 11A is a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting deviceof one embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 11A, a portionhaving a function similar to that in FIGS. 1 to 10 is represented by thesame hatch pattern as in FIGS. 1 to 10 and not especially denoted by areference numeral in some cases. In addition, common reference numeralsare used for portions having similar functions, and a detaileddescription of the portions is omitted in some cases.

A light-emitting device 256 illustrated in FIG. 11A includes, over thesubstrate 200, a transistor 240, the light-emitting element 222W, thelight-emitting element 222R, the light-emitting element 222G, and thelight-emitting element 222B.

The light-emitting element 222W is preferably a light-emitting elementwithout a microcavity structure, and each of the light-emitting element222R, the light-emitting element 222G, and the light-emitting element222B is preferably a light-emitting element with a microcavitystructure.

When each of the light-emitting element 222R, the light-emitting element222G, and the light-emitting element 222B has a microcavity structure,each of the conductive film 106R, the conductive film 106G, and theconductive film 106B preferably has a function of transmitting light. Inthis case, the thickness of the conductive film (the conductive films106R, 106G, and 106B) is adjusted, whereby the intensity of light of adesired wavelength among light emitted from the light-emitting element(the light-emitting elements 222R, 222G, and 222B) can be increased.

The conductive film 104 preferably has functions of reflecting light andtransmitting light.

In the light-emitting device 256, the optical element 224R, the opticalelement 224G, and the optical element 224B are provided between thetransistor 240 and the electrode 103R, between the transistor 240 andthe electrode 103G, and between the transistor 240 and the electrode103B. The light emitted from each light-emitting element is emittedoutside the light-emitting device through each optical element. In otherwords, the light from light-emitting element 222R, the light from thelight-emitting element 222G, and the light from the light-emittingelement 222B are emitted through the optical element 224R, the opticalelement 224G, and the optical element 224B, respectively.

When the substrate 200 is provided with the optical element, thethickness of the light-emitting device 256 can be reduced. Moreover, themanufacturing cost of the light-emitting device 256 can be reduced.

The electrode 102, the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and theelectrode 103B are electrically connected to the transistors 240.

An example of the transistor 240 in the light-emitting device 256 inFIG. 11A is described with reference to FIG. 11B. FIG. 11B is across-sectional schematic view of the transistor 240.

As the transistor 240 in FIG. 11B, for example, a field-effecttransistor (FET) can be used. The transistor 240 includes a gateelectrode 272 over the substrate 200, a gate insulating layer 274 overthe substrate 200 and the gate electrode 272, a semiconductor layer 276over the gate insulating layer 274, a source electrode 278 a over thegate insulating layer 274 and the semiconductor layer 276, and a drainelectrode 278 b over the gate insulating layer 274 and the semiconductorlayer 276. An insulating layer 282 is provided over the transistor 240,an insulating layer 284 is provided over the insulating layer 282, andan insulating layer 286 is provided over the insulating layer 284.

The insulating layer 282 has a region in contact with the semiconductorlayer 276. The insulating layer 282 can be formed using an oxideinsulating material, for example. The insulating layer 284 has afunction of suppressing entry of impurities into the transistor 240. Theinsulating layer 284 can be formed using a nitride insulating material,for example. The insulating layer 286 has a function of planarizing anunevenness surface and the like due to the transistor 240 and the like.The insulating layer 286 can be formed using an organic insulatingmaterial, for example.

An opening is provided in the insulating layer 282, the insulating layer284, and the insulating layer 286, and the drain electrode 278 b of thetransistor 240 is electrically connected to the electrode 102, theelectrode 103R, the electrode 103G, or the electrode 103B through theopening. When the transistor 240 is driven, current or voltage in theelectrode 102, the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode103B can be controlled. In this manner, an active matrix display devicein which the driving of the light-emitting device 256 is controlled bythe transistor can be provided.

The structure of the light-emitting device 250 may be referred to forthe other part of structure of the light-emitting device 256.

<Components of Light-Emitting Device>

Next, components of a light-emitting device of one embodiment of thepresent invention are described in detail below.

<<Hole-Injection Layer>>

Each of the hole-injection layers 111 and 116 has a function of reducinga barrier for hole injection from one of the pair of electrodes and thecharge-generation layer 115 to promote hole injection and is formedusing a transition metal oxide, a phthalocyanine derivative, or anaromatic amine, for example. As the transition metal oxide, molybdenumoxide, vanadium oxide, ruthenium oxide, tungsten oxide, manganese oxide,or the like can be given, for example. As the phthalocyanine derivative,phthalocyanine (abbreviation: H₂Pc), metal phthalocyanine such as copperphthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPC), or the like can be given, forexample. As the aromatic amine, a benzidine derivative, aphenylenediamine derivative, or the like can be given. It is alsopossible to use a high molecular compound such as polythiophene orpolyaniline; a typical example thereof ispoly(ethylenedioxythiophene)/poly(styrenesulfonic acid) (abbreviation:PEDOT/PSS), which is self-doped polythiophene. In addition,polyvinylcarbazole and a derivative thereof, polyarylene including anaromatic amine skeleton or a π-electron rich heteroaromatic skeleton ina side chain or a main chain and a derivative thereof, and the like aregiven as examples.

As the hole-injection layer, a layer containing a composite material ofa hole-transport material (donor material) and a material having aproperty of accepting electrons from the hole-transport material canalso be used. Alternatively, a stack of a layer containing a materialhaving an electron accepting property and a layer containing ahole-transport material may also be used. In a steady state or in thepresence of an electric field, electric charge can be transferredbetween these materials. As examples of the material having anelectron-accepting property, organic acceptors such as a quinodimethanederivative, a chloranil derivative, and a hexaazatriphenylene derivativecan be given. A specific example is a compound having anelectron-withdrawing group (a halogen group or a cyano group), such as7,7,8,8-tetracyano-2,3,5,6-tetrafluoroquinodimethane (abbreviation:F₄-TCNQ), chloranil, or2,3,6,7,10,11-hexacyano-1,4,5,8,9,12-hexaazatriphenylene (abbreviation:HAT-CN). Alternatively, a transition metal oxide such as an oxide of ametal from Group 4 to Group 8 can also be used. Specifically, vanadiumoxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, chromium oxide, molybdenum oxide,tungsten oxide, manganese oxide, rhenium oxide, or the like can be used.In particular, molybdenum oxide is preferable because it is stable inthe air, has a low hygroscopic property, and is easily handled.

A material having a property of transporting more holes than electronscan be used as the hole-transport material, and a material having a holemobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²Vs or higher is preferable. Specifically, anaromatic amine, a carbazole derivative, an aromatic hydrocarbon, astilbene derivative, or the like can be used, for example. Furthermore,the hole-transport material may be a high molecular compound.

Examples of the aromatic amine compounds having a high hole-transportproperty are N,N′-di(p-tolyl)-N,N-diphenyl-p-phenylenediamine(abbreviation: DTDPPA),4,4′-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation:DPAB),N,N′-bis{4-[bis(3-methylphenyl)amino]phenyl}-N,N′-diphenyl-(1,1′-biphenyl)-4,4′-diamine (abbreviation: DNTPD),1,3,5-tris[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]benzene(abbreviation: DPA3B), and the like.

Specific examples of the carbazole derivative are3-[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzDPA1),3,6-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzDPA2),3,6-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-(1-naphthyl)amino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzTPN2),3-[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzPCA1),3,6-bis[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzPCA2),3-[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)amino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzPCN1), and the like.

Other examples of the carbazole derivative are4,4′-di(N-carbazolyl)biphenyl (abbreviation: CBP),1,3,5-tris[4-(N-carbazolyl)phenyl]benzene (abbreviation: TCPB),9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: CzPA),1,4-bis[4-(N-carbazolyl)phenyl]-2,3,5,6-tetraphenylbenzene, and thelike.

Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon are2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA),2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(1-naphthyl)anthracene,9,10-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DPPA),2-tert-butyl-9,10-bis(4-phenylphenyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDBA),9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DNA),9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPAnth), 2-tert-butylanthracene(abbreviation: t-BuAnth), 9,10-bis(4-methyl-1-naphthyl)anthracene(abbreviation: DMNA),2-tert-butyl-9,10-bis[2-(1-naphthyl)phenyl]anthracene,9,10-bis[2-(1-naphthyl)phenyl]anthracene,2,3,6,7-tetramethyl-9,10-di(1-naphthyl)anthracene,2,3,6,7-tetramethyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene, 9,9′-bianthryl,10,10′-diphenyl-9,9′-bianthryl,10,10′-bis(2-phenylphenyl)-9,9′-bianthryl,10,10′-bis[(2,3,4,5,6-pentaphenyl)phenyl]-9,9′-bianthryl, anthracene,tetracene, rubrene, perylene, 2,5,8,11-tetra(tert-butyl)perylene, andthe like. Other examples are pentacene, coronene, and the like. Thearomatic hydrocarbon having a hole mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²Vs or higherand having 14 to 42 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.

The aromatic hydrocarbon may have a vinyl skeleton. As the aromatichydrocarbon having a vinyl group, the following are given for example:4,4′-bis(2,2-diphenylvinyl)biphenyl (abbreviation: DPVBi);9,10-bis[4-(2,2-diphenylvinyl)phenyl]anthracene (abbreviation: DPVPA);and the like.

Other examples are high molecular compounds such aspoly(N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK), poly(4-vinyltriphenylamine)(abbreviation: PVTPA),poly[N-(4-{N′-[4-(4-diphenylamino)phenyl]phenyl-N′-phenylamino}phenyl)methacrylamide](abbreviation: PTPDMA), andpoly[N,N′-bis(4-butylphenyl)-N,N′-bis(phenyl)benzidine] (abbreviation:poly-TPD).

Examples of the material having a high hole-transport property arearomatic amine compounds such as4,4′-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB ora-NPD),N,N-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N′-diphenyl-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4,4′-diamine(abbreviation: TPD), 4,4′,4″-tris(carbazol-9-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: TCTA),4,4′,4″-tris[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbreviation:1′-TNATA), 4,4′,4″-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine (abbreviation:TDATA), 4,4′,4″-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine(abbreviation: MTDATA),4,4′-bis[N-(spiro-9,9′-bifluoren-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl(abbreviation: BSPB), 4-phenyl-4′-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: BPAFLP), 4-phenyl-3′-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: mBPAFLP),N-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-yl)-N-{9,9-dimethyl-2-[N-phenyl-N-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-yl)amino]-9H-fluoren-7-yl}phenylamine(abbreviation: DFLADFL),N-(9,9-dimethyl-2-diphenylamino-9H-fluoren-7-yl)diphenylamine(abbreviation: DPNF),2-[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]spiro-9,9′-bifluorene(abbreviation: DPASF),4-phenyl-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation:PCBA1BP), 4,4′-diphenyl-4″-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: PCBBi1BP),4-(1-naphthyl)-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: PCBANB),4,4′-di(1-naphthyl)-4″-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: PCBNBB),4-phenyldiphenyl-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)amine (abbreviation:PCA1BP), N,N′-bis(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N,N-diphenylbenzene-1,3-diamine(abbreviation: PCA2B),N,N′,N″-triphenyl-N,N′,N″-tris(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)benzene-1,3,5-triamine(abbreviation: PCA3B),N-(4-biphenyl)-N-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-yl)-9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: PCBiF),N-(1,1′-biphenyl-4-yl)-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]-9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-amine(abbreviation: PCBBiF),9,9-dimethyl-N-phenyl-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]fluoren-2-amine(abbreviation: PCBAF),N-phenyl-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]spiro-9,9′-bifluoren-2-amine(abbreviation: PCBASF),2-[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]spiro-9,9′-bifluorene(abbreviation: PCASF),2,7-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]-spiro-9,9′-bifluorene(abbreviation: DPA2SF),N-[4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N-(4-phenyl)phenylaniline (abbreviation:YGA1BP), andN,N-bis[4-(carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N,N-diphenyl-9,9-dimethylfluorene-2,7-diamine(abbreviation: YGA2F). Other examples are amine compounds, carbazolecompounds, thiophene compounds, furan compounds, fluorene compounds;triphenylene compounds; phenanthrene compounds, and the like such as3-[4-(1-naphthyl)-phenyl]-9-phenyl-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCPN),3-[4-(9-phenanthryl)-phenyl]-9-phenyl-9H-carbazole (abbreviation:PCPPn), 3,3′-bis(9-phenyl-9H-carbazole) (abbreviation: PCCP),1,3-bis(N-carbazolyl)benzene (abbreviation: mCP),3,6-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: CzTP),4-{3-[3-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]phenyl}dibenzofuran(abbreviation: mmDBFFLBi-II),4,4′,4″-(benzene-1,3,5-triyl)tri(dibenzofuran) (abbreviation: DBF3P-II),1,3,5-tri(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)-benzene (abbreviated as DBT3P-II),2,8-diphenyl-4-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]dibenzothiophene(abbreviation: DBTFLP-III),4-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]-6-phenyldibenzothiophene(abbreviation: DBTFLP-IV), and4-[3-(triphenylen-2-yl)phenyl]dibenzothiophene (abbreviation:mDBTPTp-II). The substances listed here are mainly ones that have a holemobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²Vs or higher. Note that other than thesesubstances, any substance that has a property of transporting more holesthan electrons may be used.

<<Hole-Transport Layer>>

The hole-transport layer 112 and 117 contain a hole-transport material.As hole-transport material, any of the materials for the hole-injectionlayer described above can be used. In order that the hole-transportlayer has a function of transporting holes injected into thehole-injection layer to the light-emitting layer, the highest occupiedmolecular orbital (HOMO) level of the hole-transport layer is preferablyequal or close to the HOMO level of the hole-injection layer.

The hole-transport material described above preferably has a holemobility of 1×10-6 cm²/Vs or higher. Note that other than thesesubstances, any substance that has a property of transporting more holesthan electrons may be used. Note that the hole-transport layer is notlimited to a single layer and may be a stack of two or more layersincluding any of the above-mentioned substances.

<<Electron-Injection Layer>>

Each of the electron-injection layers 114 and 119 has a function ofreducing a barrier for electron injection from one of the pair ofelectrodes and the charge-generation layer 115 to promote electroninjection and can be formed using a Group 1 metal or a Group 2 metal, oran oxide, a halide, or a carbonate of any of the metals, for example.Alternatively, a composite material containing an electron-transportmaterial and a material having a property of donating electrons to theelectron-transport material can also be used. As the material having anelectron-donating property, a Group 1 metal, a Group 2 metal, an oxideof any of these metals, or the like can be given. Specific examples arean alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, and a compound thereof, suchas lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calcium fluoride(CaF₂), and lithium oxide (LiOx). A rare earth metal compound likeerbium fluoride (ErF₃) can also be used. Electride may also be used forthe electron-injection layer. Examples of the electrode include asubstance in which electrons are added at high concentration to calciumoxide-aluminum oxide.

The electron-injection layers may be formed using a composite materialin which an organic material (acceptor material) and an electron donor(donor material) are mixed. The composite material is superior in anelectron-injection property and an electron-transport property, sinceelectrons are generated in the organic material by the electron donor.The organic compound here is preferably a material excellent intransporting the generated electrons (electron-transport material);specifically, for example, an electron-transport material such as ametal complex or a heteroaromatic compound can be used. As the electrondonor, a substance showing an electron-donating property with respect tothe organic compound may be used. Specifically, an alkali metal, analkaline earth metal, and a rare earth metal are preferable, and forexample, lithium, cesium, magnesium, calcium, erbium, ytterbium, and thelike can be given. Further, an alkali metal oxide or an alkaline earthmetal oxide is preferable, and for example, lithium oxide, calciumoxide, barium oxide, and the like can be given. Alternatively, Lewisbase such as magnesium oxide can be used. An organic material such astetrathiafulvalene (abbreviation: TTF) can also be used.

As the electron-transport material, a material having a property oftransporting more electrons than holes can be used, and a materialhaving an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable. Aπ-electron deficient heteroaromatic compound such as anitrogen-containing heteroaromatic compound, a metal complex, or thelike can be used. Specific examples include a metal complex having aquinoline ligand, a benzoquinoline ligand, an oxazole ligand, and athiazole ligand. Other examples include an oxadiazole derivative, atriazole derivative, a phenanthroline derivative, a pyridine derivative,a bipyridine derivative, a pyrimidine derivative, and the like.

Specific examples include metal complexes having a quinoline orbenzoquinoline skeleton, such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III)(abbreviation: Alq), tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III)(abbreviation: Almq₃), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium(II)(abbreviation: BeBq₂), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: BAlq) andbis(8-quinolinolato)zinc(II) (abbreviation: Znq), and the like.Alternatively, a metal complex having an oxazole-based or thiazole-basedligand, such as bis[2-(2-benzoxazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation:ZnPBO) or bis[2-(2-benzothiazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation:ZnBTZ) can be used. Other than such metal complexes, any of thefollowing can be used: heterocyclic compounds such as2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation:PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene(abbreviation: OXD-7),9-[4-(5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation:CO11), 3-(4-biphenylyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole(abbreviation: TAZ),2,2′,2″-(1,3,5-benzenetriyl)tris(1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole)(abbreviation: TPBI),2-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]-1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole(abbreviation: mDBTBIm-II), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen),and bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP); heterocyclic compounds having adiazine skeleton such as2-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation:2mDBTPDBq-II),2-[3′-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline(abbreviation: 2mDBTBPDBq-II),2-[3′-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline(abbreviation: 2mCzBPDBq),2-[4-(3,6-diphenyl-9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline(abbreviation: 2CzPDBq-III),7-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation:7mDBTPDBq-II), 6-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline(abbreviation: 6mDBTPDBq-II),4,6-bis[3-(phenanthren-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation:4,6mPnP2Pm), 4,6-bis[3-(4-dibenzothienyl)phenyl]pyrimidine(abbreviation: 4,6mDBTP2Pm-II), and4,6-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation:4,6mCzP2Pm); heterocyclic compounds having a triazine skeleton such as2-{4-[3-(N-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazol-9-yl]phenyl}-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine (abbreviation: PCCzPTzn); heterocyclic compounds having a pyridineskeleton such as 3,5-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyridine(abbreviation: 35DCzPPy) and 1,3,5-tris[3-(3-pyridyl)-phenyl]benzene(abbreviation: TmPyPB); and heteroaromatic compounds such as4,4′-bis(5-methylbenzoxazol-2-yl)stilbene (abbreviation: BzOs). Furtheralternatively, a high molecular compound such as poly(2,5-pyridinediyl)(abbreviation: PPy),poly[(9,9-dihexylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(pyridine-3,5-diyl)](abbreviation:PF-Py) orpoly[(9,9-dioctylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(2,2′-bipyridine-6,6′-diyl)](abbreviation: PF-BPy) can be used. The substances listed here aremainly ones that have an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²Vs or higher.However, any substance other than the above-described substances may beused as long as it is a substance whose electron-transport property ishigher than the hole-transport property.

<<Electron-Transport Layer>>

Each of the electron-transport layers 113 and 118 has a function oftransporting, to the light-emitting layer, electrons injected from theother of the pair of electrodes through the electron-injection layer119. A material having a property of transporting more electrons thanholes can be used as an electron-transport material, and a materialhaving an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable. Asthe electron-transport material, a π-electron deficient heteroaromaticcompound such as a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic compound, a metalcomplex, or the like can be used, for example. Specifically, there aremetal complexes having a quinoline ligand, a benzoquinoline ligand, anoxazole ligand, and a thiazole ligand, which are described as theelectron-transport materials that can be used in the electron-injectionlayer. In addition, an oxadiazole derivative, a triazole derivative, aphenanthroline derivative, a pyridine derivative, a bipyridinederivative, a pyrimidine derivative, and the like can be given. Notethat a substance other than the above substances may be used as long asit has a higher electron-transport property than a hole-transportproperty. The electron-transport layer is not limited to a single layerand may include two or more stacking layers containing the abovesubstances.

A layer for controlling transport of electron carriers may be providedbetween the electron-transport layer and the light-emitting layer. Thisis a layer formed by addition of a small amount of a substance having ahigh electron-trapping property to a material having a highelectron-transport property as described above, and the layer is capableof adjusting carrier balance by suppressing transport of electroncarriers. Such a structure is very effective in preventing a problem(such as a reduction in element lifetime) caused when electrons passthrough the light-emitting layer.

An n-type compound semiconductor may also be used, and an oxide such astitanium oxide, zinc oxide, silicon oxide, tin oxide, tungsten oxide,tantalum oxide, barium titanate, barium zirconate, zirconium oxide,hafnium oxide, aluminum oxide, yttrium oxide, or zirconium silicate; anitride such as silicon nitride; cadmium sulfide; zinc selenide; or zincsulfide can be used, for example.

<<Light-Emitting Layer>>

One of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 includes a light-emittingmaterial having a peak of an emission spectrum in a wavelength range ofat least one color selected from violet, blue, and blue green. The otherthereof includes a light-emitting material having a peak of an emissionspectrum in a wavelength range of at least one color selected fromgreen, yellow green, yellow, yellow orange, orange, and red. Eachlight-emitting layer includes a host material in addition to thelight-emitting material. The host material preferably includes one orboth of an electron-transport material and a hole-transport material.

As the light-emitting material used in the light-emitting layer, alight-emitting material having a function of converting the singletexcitation energy into light emission or a light-emitting materialhaving a function of converting the triplet excitation energy into lightemission can be used. Examples of the light-emitting materials are givenbelow.

Examples of the light-emitting material having a function of convertingsinglet excitation energy into light emission include substances thatemit fluorescence (fluorescent compound). Although there is noparticular limitation on the fluorescent compound, an anthracenederivative, a tetracene derivative, a chrysene derivative, aphenanthrene derivative, a pyrene derivative, a perylene derivative, astilbene derivative, an acridone derivative, a coumarin derivative, aphenoxazine derivative, a phenothiazine derivative, or the like ispreferably used, and for example, any of the following substances can beused.

Specifically, examples of such materials include5,6-bis[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-2,2′-bipyridine (abbreviation:PAP2BPy), 5,6-bis[4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)biphenyl-4-yl]-2,2′-bipyridine(abbreviation: PAPP2BPy),N,N-bis[4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N,N′-diphenylstilbene-4,4′-diamine(abbreviation: YGA2S),4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: YGAPA),4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: 2YGAPPA),N,9-diphenyl-N-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: PCAPA),4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: PCBAPA),4-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: PCBAPBA), perylene, 2,5,8,11-tetra(tert-butyl)perylene(abbreviation: TBP),N,N′-diphenyl-N,N′-bis[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]pyrene-1,6-diamine(abbreviation: 1,6FLPAPrn),N,N-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N-bis[3-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]-pyrene-1,6-diamine (abbreviation 1,6mMemFLPAPrn),N,N′-bis(dibenzofuran-2-yl)-N,N′-diphenylpyrene-1,6-diamine(abbreviation: 1,6FrAPrn),N,N-bis(dibenzothiophen-2-yl)-N,N-diphenylpyrene-1,6-diamine(abbreviation: 1,6ThAPrn),N,N′-(2-tert-butylanthracene-9,10-diyldi-4,1-phenylene)bis[N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine] (abbreviation: DPABPA),N,9-diphenyl-N-[4-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: 2PCAPPA),N-[4-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)phenyl]-N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine(abbreviation: 2DPAPPA),N,N,N′,N′,N″,N″,N″′,N″′-octaphenyldibenzo[g,p]chrysene-2,7,10,15-tetraamine(abbreviation: DBC1), coumarin 30,N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-N,9-diphenyl-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: 2PCAPA),N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine(abbreviation: 2DPAPA), N,N,9-triphenylanthracen-9-amine (abbreviation:DPhAPhA), coumarin 6, coumarin 545T, N,N-diphenylquinacridone(abbreviation: DPQd), rubrene,5,12-bis(1,1′-biphenyl-4-yl)-6,11-diphenyltetracene (abbreviation: BPT),2-(2-{2-[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]ethenyl}-6-methyl-4H-pyran-4-ylidene)propanedinitrile(abbreviation: DCM1),2-{2-methyl-6-[2-(2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile(abbreviation: DCM2),N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(4-methylphenyl)tetracene-5,11-diamine (abbreviation:p-mPhTD),7,14-diphenyl-N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(4-methylphenyl)acenaphtho[1,2-a]fluoranthene-3,10-diamine (abbreviation: p-mPhAFD),2-{2-isopropyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile(abbreviation: DCJTI),2-{2-tert-butyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile(abbreviation: DCJTB),2-(2,6-bis{2-[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]ethenyl}-4H-pyran-4-ylidene)propanedinitrile(abbreviation: BisDCM),2-{2,6-bis[2-(8-methoxy-1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile (abbreviation:BisDCJTM), and5,10,15,20-tetraphenylbisbenzo[5,6]indeno[1,2,3-cd:1′,2′,3′-lm]perylene.

As the light-emitting material having a function of converting tripletexcitation energy into light emission (phosphorescent compound), aniridium-, rhodium-, or platinum-based organometallic complex or metalcomplex can be used; in particular, an organoiridium complex such as aniridium-based ortho-metalated complex is preferable. As anortho-metalated ligand, a 4H-triazole ligand, a 1H-triazole ligand, animidazole ligand, a pyridine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyrazineligand, an isoquinoline ligand, or the like can be given. As the metalcomplex, a platinum complex having a porphyrin ligand or the like can begiven.

Examples of the substance that has an emission peak in the blue or greenwavelength range include organometallic iridium complexes having a4H-triazole skeleton, such astris{2-[5-(2-methylphenyl)-4-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl-κN2]phenyl-κC}iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(mpptz-dmp)₃),tris(5-methyl-3,4-diphenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(Mptz)₃),tris[4-(3-biphenyl)-5-isopropyl-3-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(iPrptz-3b)₃), andtris[3-(5-biphenyl)-5-isopropyl-4-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(iPr5btz)₃); organometallic iridium complexes having a1H-triazole skeleton, such astris[3-methyl-1-(2-methylphenyl)-5-phenyl-1H-1,2,4-triazolato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(Mptz1-mp)₃) andtris(1-methyl-5-phenyl-3-propyl-TH-1,2,4-triazolato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(Prptzl-Me)₃); organometallic iridium complexes havingan imidazole skeleton, such asfac-tris[1-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)-2-phenyl-1H-imidazole]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(iPrpmi)₃) andtris[3-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-7-methylimidazo[1,2-f]phenanthridinato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(dmpimpt-Me)₃); and organometallic iridium complexes inwhich a phenylpyridine derivative having an electron-withdrawing groupis a ligand, such asbis[2-(4′,6′-difluorophenyl)pyridinato-N,C²′]iridium(III)tetrakis(1-pyrazolyl)borate (abbreviation: FIr6),bis[2-(4′,6′-difluorophenyl)pyridinato-N,C²′]iridium(III) picolinate(abbreviation: FIrpic),bis{2-[3′,5′-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]pyridinato-N,C²′}iridium(III)picolinate(abbreviation: Ir(CF3ppy)₂(pic)), andbis[2-(4′,6′-difluorophenyl)pyridinato-N,C²′]iridium(III)acetylacetonate (abbreviation: FIr(acac)). Among the materials givenabove, the organometallic iridium complexes having a 4H-triazoleskeleton have high reliability and high emission efficiency and are thusespecially preferable.

Examples of the substance that has an emission peak in the green oryellow wavelength range include organometallic iridium complexes havinga pyrimidine skeleton, such astris(4-methyl-6-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation:Ir(mppm)₃), tris(4-t-butyl-6-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(tBuppm)₃),(acetylacetonato)bis(6-methyl-4-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(mppm)₂(acac)),(acetylacetonato)bis(6-tert-butyl-4-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac)),(acetylacetonato)bis[4-(2-norbornyl)-6-phenylpyrimidinato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(nbppm)₂(acac)),(acetylacetonato)bis[5-methyl-6-(2-methylphenyl)-4-phenylpyrimidinato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(mpmppm)₂(acac)),(acetylacetonato)bis{4,6-dimethyl-2-[6-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-4-pyrimidinyl-κN3]phenyl-κC}iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(dmppm-dmp)₂(acac)),(acetylacetonato)bis(4,6-diphenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(dppm)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexes havinga pyrazine skeleton, such as(acetylacetonato)bis(3,5-dimethyl-2-phenylpyrazinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(mppr-Me)₂(acac)) and(acetylacetonato)bis(5-isopropyl-3-methyl-2-phenylpyrazinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(mppr-iPr)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexeshaving a pyridine skeleton, such astris(2-phenylpyridinato-N,C²′)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(ppy)₃),bis(2-phenylpyridinato-N,C²′)iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation:Ir(ppy)₂(acac)), bis(benzo[h]quinolinato)iridium(III) acetylacetonate(abbreviation: Ir(bzq)₂(acac)), tris(benzo[h]quinolinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(bzq)₃), tris(2-phenylquinolinato-N,C²′)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(pq)₃), and bis(2-phenylquinolinato-N,C²)iridium(III)acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(pq)₂(acac)); organometallic iridiumcomplexes such as bis(2,4-diphenyl-1,3-oxazolato-N,C²′)iridium(III)acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(dpo)₂(acac)),bis{2-[4′-(perfluorophenyl)phenyl]pyridinato-N,C²′}iridium(III)acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(p-PF-ph)₂(acac)), andbis(2-phenylbenzothiazolato-N,C²′)iridium(III) acetylacetonate(abbreviation: Ir(bt)₂(acac)); and a rare earth metal complex such astris(acetylacetonato)(monophenanthroline)terbium(III) (abbreviation:Tb(acac)₃(Phen)). Among the materials given above, the organometalliciridium complexes having a pyrimidine skeleton have distinctively highreliability and emission efficiency and are thus particularlypreferable.

Examples of the substance that has an emission peak in the yellow or redwavelength range include organometallic iridium complexes having apyrimidine skeleton, such as(diisobutyrylmethanato)bis[4,6-bis(3-methylphenyl)pyrimidinato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(5mdppm)₂(dibm)),bis[4,6-bis(3-methylphenyl)pyrimidinato](dipivaloylmethanato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(5mdppm)₂(dpm)), and(dipivaloylmethanato)bis[4,6-di(naphthalen-1-yl)pyrimidinato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(dlnpm)₂(dpm)); organometallic iridium complexes havinga pyrazine skeleton, such as(acetylacetonato)bis(2,3,5-triphenylpyrazinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(tppr)₂(acac)),bis(2,3,5-triphenylpyrazinato)(dipivaloylmethanato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(tppr)₂(dpm)), and(acetylacetonato)bis[2,3-bis(4-fluorophenyl)quinoxalinato]iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(Fdpq)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexes havinga pyridine skeleton, such astris(1-phenylisoquinolinato-N,C²′)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(piq)₃)and bis(1-phenylisoquinolinato-N,C²′)iridium(III) acetylacetonate(abbreviation: Ir(piq)₂(acac)); a platinum complex such as2,3,7,8,12,13,17,18-octaethyl-21H,23H-porphyrin platinum(II)(abbreviation: PtOEP); and rare earth metal complexes such astris(1,3-diphenyl-1,3-propanedionato)(monophenanthroline)europium(III)(abbreviation: Eu(DBM)₃(Phen)) andtris[1-(2-thenoyl)-3,3,3-trifluoroacetonato](monophenanthroline)europium(III)(abbreviation: Eu(TTA)₃(Phen)). Among the materials given above, theorganometallic iridium complexes having a pyrimidine skeleton havedistinctively high reliability and emission efficiency and are thusparticularly preferable. Furthermore, the organometallic iridiumcomplexes having a pyrazine skeleton can provide red light emission withfavorable chromaticity.

Although there is no particular limitation on a material that can beused as a host material of the light-emitting layer, for example, any ofthe following substances can be used for the host material: metalcomplexes such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation:Alq), tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Almq₃),bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium(II) (abbreviation: BeBq₂),bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum(III)(abbreviation: BAlq), bis(8-quinolinolato)zinc(II) (abbreviation: Znq),bis[2-(2-benzoxazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnPBO), andbis[2-(2-benzothiazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnBTZ);heterocyclic compounds such as2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation:PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene(abbreviation: OXD-7),3-(4-biphenylyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole(abbreviation: TAZ),2,2′,2″-(1,3,5-benzenetriyl)tris(1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole)(abbreviation: TPBI), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: Bphen),bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP), and9-[4-(5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation:CO11); and aromatic amine compounds such as NPB, TPD, and BSPB. Inaddition, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as anthracenederivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, chrysenederivatives, and dibenzo[g,p]chrysene derivatives can be used. Specificexamples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic compound include9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPAnth),N,N-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: CzA1PA), 4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: DPhPA), YGAPA, PCAPA,N,9-diphenyl-N-{4-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]phenyl}-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: PCAPBA), 2PCAPA, 6,12-dimethoxy-5,11-diphenylchrysene,DBC1, 9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthracenyl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation:CzPA), 3,6-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole(abbreviation: DPCzPA),9-phenyl-3-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation:PCzPA), 7-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-7H-dibenzo[c,g]carbazole(abbreviation: cgDBCzPA),6-[3-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)phenyl]-benzo[b]naphtho[1,2-d]furan(abbreviation: 2mBnfPPA),9-phenyl-10-{4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)biphenyl-4′-yl}anthracene(abbreviation: FLPPA), 9,10-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)anthracene(abbreviation: DPPA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DNA),2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA),9,9′-bianthryl (abbreviation: BANT),9,9′-(stilbene-3,3′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS),9,9′-(stilbene-4,4′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS2),1,3,5-tri(1-pyrenyl)benzene (abbreviation: TPB3),5,12-diphenyltetracene, 5,12-bis(biphenyl-2-yl)tetracene, and the like.One or more substances having a wider energy gap than theabove-described light-emitting material is preferably selected fromthese substances and a variety of substances. Moreover, in the casewhere the light-emitting material emits phosphorescence, a substancehaving triplet excitation energy (energy difference between a groundstate and a triplet excited state) which is higher than that of thelight-emitting material is preferably selected as the host material.

In the case where a plurality of materials are used as the host materialof the light-emitting layer, it is preferable to use a combination oftwo kinds of compounds which form an exciplex. In this case, a varietyof carrier-transport materials can be used as appropriate. In order toform an exciplex efficiently, it is particularly preferable to combinean electron-transport material and a hole-transport material.

This is because in the case where the combination of anelectron-transport material and a hole-transport material which form anexciplex is used as a host material, the carrier balance between holesand electrons in the light-emitting layer can be easily optimized byadjustment of the mixture ratio of the electron-transport material andthe hole-transport material. The optimization of the carrier balancebetween holes and electrons in the light-emitting layer can prevent aregion in which electrons and holes are recombined from existing on oneside in the light-emitting layer. By preventing the region in whichelectrons and holes are recombined from existing on one side, thereliability of the light-emitting element can be improved.

As the electron-transport material, a π-electron deficientheteroaromatic compound such as a nitrogen-containing heteroaromaticcompound, a metal complex, or the like can be used. Specifically, anelectron-transport material that can be used for an electron-injectionlayer or an electron-transport layer can be used. Among such materials,heterocyclic compounds having a pyridine skeleton, a diazine skeleton,or a triazine skeleton have high reliability and are thus preferable.Heterocyclic compounds having a diazine (pyrimidine or pyrazine)skeleton or a triazine skeleton have a high electron-transport propertyand contribute to a reduction in drive voltage.

As the hole-transport material, a π-electron rich heteroaromaticcompound (e.g., a carbazole derivative or an indole derivative), anaromatic amine compound, or the like can be favorably used.Specifically, the hole-transport material that can be used for thehole-injection layer or the hole-transport layer can be used. Among suchmaterials, a compound having an aromatic amine skeleton and a compoundhaving a carbazole skeleton are preferable because these compounds arehighly reliable and have high hole-transport properties to contribute toa reduction in drive voltage.

Note that the combination of the materials which form an exciplex and isused as a host material is not limited to the above-described compounds,as long as they can transport carriers, the combination can form anexciplex, and light emission of the exciplex overlaps with an absorptionband on the longest wavelength side in an absorption spectrum of alight-emitting substance (an absorption corresponding to the transitionof the light-emitting substance from the singlet ground state to thesinglet excited state), and other materials may be used.

In order that the above-described hole-transport material and theelectron-transport material efficiently form an exciplex, it ispreferable that the HOMO level of the hole-transport material be higherthan that of the electron-transport material and the lowest unoccupiedmolecular orbital (LUMO) level of the hole-transport material be higherthan the LUMO level of the electron-transport material. Specifically,the difference between the HOMO level of the hole-transport material andthe HOMO level of the electron-transport material is preferably 0.05 eVor more, further preferably 0.1 eV or more, and still further preferably0.2 eV or more. In addition, the difference between the LUMO level ofthe hole-transport material and the LUMO level of the electron-transportmaterial is preferably 0.05 eV or more, further preferably 0.1 eV ormore, and still further preferably 0.2 eV or more.

As the light-emitting material or host material of the light-emittinglayer, a thermally activated delayed fluorescent (TADF) substance may beused. The thermally activated delayed fluorescent substance is amaterial having a small difference between the level of the tripletexcitation energy and the level of the singlet excitation energy and afunction of converting triplet excitation energy into singlet excitationenergy by reverse intersystem crossing. Conditions for efficientlyobtaining thermally activated delayed fluorescence are as follows: theenergy difference between the S1 level and the T1 level is preferablygreater than 0 eV and less than or equal to 0.3 eV, further preferablygreater than 0 eV and less than or equal to 0.2 eV, still furtherpreferably greater than 0 eV and less than or equal to 0.1 eV.

The thermally activated delayed fluorescent substance may be composed ofone kind of material or a plurality of materials. For example, in thecase where the thermally activated delayed fluorescent substance iscomposed of one kind of material, any of the following materials can beused, for example.

First, a fullerene, a derivative thereof, an acridine derivative such asproflavine, eosin, and the like can be given. Furthermore, ametal-containing porphyrin, such as a porphyrin containing magnesium(Mg), zinc (Zn), cadmium (Cd), tin (Sn), platinum (Pt), indium (In), orpalladium (Pd), can be given. Examples of the metal-containing porphyrininclude a protoporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Proto IX)), amesoporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Meso IX)), ahematoporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Hemato IX)), a coproporphyrintetramethyl ester-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Copro III-4Me)), anoctaethylporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(OEP)), anetioporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Etio I)), and anoctaethylporphyrin-platinum chloride complex (PtCl₂OEP).

Alternatively, a heterocyclic compound having a π-electron richheteroaromatic ring and a π-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring, suchas2-(biphenyl-4-yl)-4,6-bis(12-phenylindolo[2,3-a]carbazol-11-yl)-1,3,5-triazine(abbreviation: PIC-TRZ),2-{4-[3-(N-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazol-9-yl]phenyl}-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine(abbreviation: PCCzPTzn),2-[4-(10H-phenoxazin-10-yl)phenyl]-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine(abbreviation: PXZ-TRZ),3-[4-(5-phenyl-5,10-dihydrophenazin-10-yl)phenyl]-4,5-diphenyl-1,2,4-triazole(abbreviation: PPZ-3TPT),3-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-acridin-10-yl)-9H-xanthen-9-one (abbreviation:ACRXTN), bis[4-(9,9-dimethyl-9,10-dihydroacridine)phenyl]sulfone(abbreviation: DMAC-DPS), or10-phenyl-10H,10′H-spiro[acridin-9,9′-anthracen]-10′-one (abbreviation:ACRSA), can be used for example as the thermally activated delayedfluorescent substance composed of one kind of material. The heterocycliccompound is preferably used because of the r-electron richheteroaromatic ring and the π-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring,for which the electron-transport property and the hole-transportproperty are high. Note that a substance in which the/r-electron richheteroaromatic ring is directly bonded to the/r-electron deficientheteroaromatic ring is particularly preferably used because the donorproperty of the π-electron rich heteroaromatic ring and the acceptorproperty of the/r-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring are bothincreased and the difference between the level of the singlet excitationenergy and the level of the triplet excitation energy becomes small.

In the case where the thermally activated delayed fluorescent substanceis used as the host material, it is preferable to use a combination oftwo kinds of materials which form an exciplex. In this case, it isparticularly preferable to use the above-described combination of anelectron-transport material and a hole-transport material, which formsan exciplex.

In one of both of the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emittinglayer 140, a material other than the host material and thelight-emitting material may be contained.

Note that the light-emitting layer, the hole-injection layer, thehole-transport layer, the electron-transport layer, theelectron-injection layer, and the charge-generation layer describedabove can each be formed by an evaporation method (including a vacuumevaporation method), an ink-jet method, a coating method, anozzle-printing method, a gravure printing method, or the like. Besidesthe above-mentioned materials, an inorganic compound such as a quantumdot or a high molecular compound (e.g., an oligomer, a dendrimer, or apolymer) may be used in the light-emitting layer, the hole-injectionlayer, the hole-transport layer, the electron-transport layer, and theelectron-injection layer.

As a light-emitting material, a quantum dot can be used. A quantum dotis a semiconductor nanocrystal with a size of several nanometers toseveral tens of nanometers and contains approximately 1×10 to 1×10⁶atoms. Since energy shift of quantum dots depend on their size, quantumdots made of the same substance emit light with different wavelengthsdepending on their size. Thus, emission wavelengths can be easilyadjusted by changing the size of quantum dots.

Since a quantum dot has an emission spectrum with a narrow peak,emission with high color purity can be obtained. In addition, a quantumdot is said to have a theoretical internal quantum efficiency of 100%,which far exceeds that of a fluorescent organic compound, i.e., 25%, andis comparable to that of a phosphorescent organic compound. Therefore, aquantum dot can be used as a light-emitting material to obtain alight-emitting element having high luminous efficiency. Furthermore,since a quantum dot which is an inorganic material has high inherentstability, a light-emitting element which is favorable also in terms oflifetime can be obtained.

Examples of a material of a quantum dot include a Group 14 element inthe periodic table, a Group 15 element in the periodic table, a Group 16element in the periodic table, a compound of a plurality of Group 14elements in the periodic table, a compound of an element belonging toany of Groups 4 to 14 in the periodic table and a Group 16 element inthe periodic table, a compound of a Group 2 element in the periodictable and a Group 16 element in the periodic table, a compound of aGroup 13 element in the periodic table and a Group 15 element in theperiodic table, a compound of a Group 13 element in the periodic tableand a Group 17 element in the periodic table, a compound of a Group 14element in the periodic table and a Group 15 element in the periodictable, a compound of a Group 11 element in the periodic table and aGroup 17 element in the periodic table, iron oxides, titanium oxides,spinel chalcogenides, and semiconductor clusters.

Specific examples include, but are not limited to, cadmium selenide(CdSe); cadmium sulfide (CdS); cadmium telluride (CdTe); zinc selenide(ZnSe); zinc oxide (ZnO); zinc sulfide (ZnS); zinc telluride (ZnTe);mercury sulfide (HgS); mercury selenide (HgSe); mercury telluride(HgTe); indium arsenide (InAs); indium phosphide (InP); gallium arsenide(GaAs); gallium phosphide (GaP); indium nitride (InN); gallium nitride(GaN); indium antimonide (InSb); gallium antimonide (GaSb); aluminumphosphide (AlP); aluminum arsenide (AlAs); aluminum antimonide (AlSb);lead(II) selenide (PbSe); lead(II) telluride (PbTe); lead(II) sulfide(PbS); indium selenide (In₂Se₃); indium telluride (In₂Te₃); indiumsulfide (In₂S₃); gallium selenide (Ga₂Se₃); arsenic(III) sulfide(As₂S₃); arsenic(III) selenide (As₂Se₃); arsenic(III) telluride(As₂Te₃); antimony(III) sulfide (Sb₂S₃); antimony(III) selenide(Sb₂Se₃); antimony(III) telluride (Sb₂Te₃); bismuth(III) sulfide(Bi₂S₃); bismuth(III) selenide (Bi₂Se₃); bismuth(III) telluride(Bi₂Te₃); silicon (Si); silicon carbide (SiC); germanium (Ge); tin (Sn);selenium (Se); tellurium (Te); boron (B); carbon (C); phosphorus (P);boron nitride (BN); boron phosphide (BP); boron arsenide (BAs); aluminumnitride (AlN); aluminum sulfide (Al₂S₃); barium sulfide (BaS); bariumselenide (BaSe); barium telluride (BaTe); calcium sulfide (CaS); calciumselenide (CaSe); calcium telluride (CaTe); beryllium sulfide (BeS);beryllium selenide (BeSe); beryllium telluride (BeTe); magnesium sulfide(MgS); magnesium selenide (MgSe); germanium sulfide (GeS); germaniumselenide (GeSe); germanium telluride (GeTe); tin(IV) sulfide (SnS₂);tin(II) sulfide (SnS); tin(II) selenide (SnSe); tin(II) telluride(SnTe); lead(II) oxide (PbO); copper(I) fluoride (CuF); copper(I)chloride (CuCl); copper(I) bromide (CuBr); copper(I) iodide (CuI);copper(I) oxide (Cu₂O); copper(I) selenide (Cu₂Se); nickel(II) oxide(NiO); cobalt(II) oxide (CoO); cobalt(II) sulfide (CoS); triirontetraoxide (Fe₃O₄); iron(II) sulfide (FeS); manganese(II) oxide (MnO);molybdenum(IV) sulfide (MoS₂); vanadium(II) oxide (VO); vanadium(IV)oxide (VO₂); tungsten(IV) oxide (WO₂); tantalum(V) oxide (Ta₂O₅);titanium oxide (e.g., TiO₂, Ti₂O₅, Ti₂O₃, or Ti₅O₉); zirconium oxide(ZrO₂); silicon nitride (Si₃N₄); germanium nitride (Ge₃N₄); aluminumoxide (Al₂O₃); barium titanate (BaTiO₃); a compound of selenium, zinc,and cadmium (CdZnSe); a compound of indium, arsenic, and phosphorus(InAsP); a compound of cadmium, selenium, and sulfur (CdSeS); a compoundof cadmium, selenium, and tellurium (CdSeTe); a compound of zinc,cadmium, and selenium (ZnCdSe); a compound of indium, gallium, andarsenic (InGaAs); a compound of indium, gallium, and selenium (InGaSe);a compound of indium, selenium, and sulfur (InSeS); a compound ofcopper, indium, and sulfur (e.g., CuInS₂); and combinations thereof.What is called an alloyed quantum dot, whose composition is representedby a given ratio, may be used. For example, an alloyed quantum dotrepresented by CdSxSei-z (where x is any number between 0 and 1inclusive) is a means effective in obtaining blue light because theemission wavelength can be changed by changing x.

As the quantum dot, any of a core-type quantum dot, a core-shell quantumdot, a core-multishell quantum dot, and the like can be used. Note thatwhen a core is covered with a shell formed of another inorganic materialhaving a wider band gap, the influence of defects and dangling bondsexisting at the surface of a nanocrystal can be reduced. Since such astructure can significantly improve the quantum efficiency of lightemission, it is preferable to use a core-shell or core-multishellquantum dot. Examples of the material of a shell include zinc sulfide(ZnS) and zinc oxide (ZnO).

Quantum dots have a high proportion of surface atoms and thus have highreactivity and easily cohere together. For this reason, it is preferablethat a protective agent be attached to, or a protective group beprovided at the surfaces of quantum dots. The attachment of theprotective agent or the provision of the protective group can preventcohesion and increase solubility in a solvent. It can also reducereactivity and improve electrical stability. Examples of the protectiveagent (or the protective group) include polyoxyethylene alkyl etherssuch as polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, andpolyoxyethylene oleyl ether; trialkylphosphines such astripropylphosphine, tributylphosphine, trihexylphosphine, andtrioctylphoshine; polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers such aspolyoxyethylene n-octylphenyl ether and polyoxyethylene n-nonylphenylether; tertiary amines such as tri(n-hexyl)amine, tri(n-octyl)amine, andtri(n-decyl)amine; organophosphorus compounds such as tripropylphosphineoxide, tributylphosphine oxide, trihexylphosphine oxide,trioctylphosphine oxide, and tridecylphosphine oxide; polyethyleneglycol diesters such as polyethylene glycol dilaurate and polyethyleneglycol distearate; organic nitrogen compounds such asnitrogen-containing aromatic compounds, e.g., pyridines, lutidines,collidines, and quinolines; aminoalkanes such as hexylamine, octylamine,decylamine, dodecylamine, tetradecylamine, hexadecylamine, andoctadecylamine; dialkylsulfides such as dibutylsulfide;dialkylsulfoxides such as dimethylsulfoxide and dibutylsulfoxide;organic sulfur compounds such as sulfur-containing aromatic compounds,e.g., thiophene; higher fatty acids such as a palmitin acid, a stearicacid, and an oleic acid; alcohols; sorbitan fatty acid esters; fattyacid modified polyesters; tertiary amine modified polyurethanes; andpolyethyleneimines.

The quantum dots may be quantum rods, which are rod-like shape quantumdots. A quantum rod emits directional light polarized in the c-axisdirection; thus, quantum rods can be used as a light-emitting materialto obtain a light-emitting element with higher external quantumefficiency.

In the case of using quantum dots as the light-emitting material in thelight-emitting layer, the thickness of the light-emitting layer is setto 3 nm to 100 nm, preferably 10 nm to 100 nm, and the light-emittinglayer is made to contain 1 volume % to 100 volume % of the quantum dots.Note that it is preferable that the light-emitting layer be composed ofthe quantum dots. To form a light-emitting layer in which the quantumdots are dispersed as light-emitting materials in host materials, thequantum dots may be dispersed in the host materials, or the hostmaterials and the quantum dots may be dissolved or dispersed in anappropriate liquid medium, and then a wet process (e.g., a spin coatingmethod, a casting method, a die coating method, blade coating method, aroll coating method, an ink-jet method, a printing method, a spraycoating method, a curtain coating method, or a Langmuir-Blodgett method)may be employed.

An example of the liquid medium used for the wet process is an organicsolvent of ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone and cyclohexanone; fattyacid esters such as ethyl acetate; halogenated hydrocarbons such asdichlorobenzene; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene,mesitylene, and cyclohexylbenzene; aliphatic hydrocarbons such ascyclohexane, decalin, and dodecane; dimethylformamide (DMF); dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO); or the like.

Examples of the high molecular compound that can be used for thelight-emitting layer include a phenylenevinylene (PPV) derivative suchas poly[2-methoxy-5-(2-ethylhexyloxy)-1,4-phenylenevinylene](abbreviation: MEH-PPV) or poly(2,5-dioctyl-1,4-phenylenevinylene); apolyfluorene derivative such as poly(9,9-di-n-octylfluorenyl-2,7-diyl)(abbreviation: PF8),poly[(9,9-di-n-octylfluorenyl-2,7-diyl)-alt-(benzo[2,1,3]thiadiazole-4,8-diyl)](abbreviation:F8BT),poly(9,9-di-n-octylfluorenyl-2,7-diyl)-alt-(2,2′-bithiophene-5,5′-diyl)](abbreviation: F8T2),poly[(9,9-dioctyl-2,7-divinylenefluorenylene)-alt-(9,10-anthracene)], orpoly[(9,9-dihexylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-alt-(2,5-dimethyl-1,4-phenylene)]; apolyalkylthiophene (PAT) derivative such aspoly(3-hexylthiophen-2,5-diyl) (abbreviation: P3HT); and a polyphenylenederivative. These high molecular compounds, poly(9-vinylcarbazole)(abbreviation: PVK), poly(2-vinylnaphthalene), poly[bis(4-phenyl)(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)amine] (abbreviation: PTAA), or the like may bedoped with a light-emitting low molecular compound and used for thelight-emitting layer. As the light-emitting low molecular compound, anyof the above-described light-emitting materials can be used.

<<Charge-Generation Layer>>

The charge-generation layer 115 may have either a structure in which anacceptor substance that is an electron acceptor is added to ahole-transport material or a structure in which a donor substance thatis an electron donor is added to an electron-transport material.Alternatively, both of these structures may be stacked.

In the case where the charge-generation layer 115 contains a compositematerial of an organic compound and an acceptor substance, the compositematerial that can be used for the hole-injection layer may be used forthe composite material. As the organic compound, a variety of compoundssuch as an aromatic amine compound, a carbazole compound, an aromatichydrocarbon, and a high molecular compound (such as an oligomer, adendrimer, or a polymer) can be used. An organic compound having a holemobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferably used as the organiccompound. Note that any other material may be used as long as it has aproperty of transporting more holes than electrons. Since the compositematerial of an organic compound and an acceptor substance has excellentcarrier-injection and carrier-transport properties, low-voltage drivingor low-current driving can be realized.

The charge-generation layer 115 may have a stacked structure of a layercontaining the composite material of an organic compound and an acceptorsubstance and a layer containing another material. For example, thecharge-generation layer 115 may be formed using a combination of a layercontaining the composite material of an organic compound and an acceptorsubstance with a layer containing one compound selected from among donormaterials and a compound having a high electron-transport property.Furthermore, the charge-generation layer 115 may be formed using acombination of a layer containing the composite material of an organiccompound and an acceptor substance with a layer containing a transparentconductive material.

Note that in terms of light extraction efficiency, the charge-generationlayer 115 preferably has a visible light transmittance (specifically, avisible light transmittance of higher than or equal to 40% with respectto the charge-generation layer 115). The charge-generation layer 115functions even if it has lower conductivity than the pair of electrodes.

Forming the charge-generation layer 115 by using any of the abovematerials can suppress an increase in drive voltage caused by the stackof the light-emitting layers.

<<Pair of Electrodes>>

Each of the electrode 101, the electrode 102, and the electrode 103 (theelectrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B) has afunction of injecting holes or electrons to the light-emitting layer.The electrode 101, the electrode 102, and the electrode 103 (theelectrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B) can beformed using a metal, an alloy, a conductive compound, a mixturethereof, or a stacked body thereof. A typical example of the metal isaluminum (Al); besides, a transition metal such as silver (Ag),tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, copper, or titanium, an alkali metalsuch as lithium (Li) or cesium, or a Group 2 metal such as calcium ormagnesium (Mg) can be used. As the transition metal, a rare earth metalsuch as ytterbium (Yb) may be used. An alloy containing any of the abovemetals can be used as the alloy, and MgAg and AlLi can be given asexamples. Examples of the conductive compound include metal oxides suchas indium tin oxide (hereinafter, referred to as ITO), indium tin oxidecontaining silicon or silicon oxide (ITSO), indium oxide-zinc oxide(indium zinc oxide), indium oxide containing tungsten oxide and zincoxide, and the like. It is also possible to use an inorganiccarbon-based material such as graphene as the conductive compound. Asdescribed above, the electrode may be formed by stacking two or more ofthese materials.

Light emitted from the light-emitting layer is extracted through one ofboth of the electrodes. Thus, at least the electrode 102 and theelectrode 103 (the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode103B) have a function of transmitting visible light. As the conductivematerial transmitting light, a conductive material having a visiblelight transmittance higher than or equal to 40% and lower than or equalto 100%, preferably higher than or equal to 60% and lower than or equalto 100%, and a resistivity lower than or equal to 1×10² Ω·cm can beused. Furthermore, the conductive film 104 in the electrode 103 (theelectrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103B) ispreferably formed using a conductive material having functions oftransmitting light and reflecting light. As the conductive material, aconductive material having a visible light reflectivity higher than orequal to 20% and lower than or equal to 80%, preferably higher than orequal to 40% and lower than or equal to 70%, and a resistivity lowerthan or equal to 1×10⁻² Ω·cm can be used. In the case where a materialwith low light transmittance, such as metal or alloy, is used, theconductive film 104 is formed to a thickness that is thin enough totransmit visible light (e.g., a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nmand less than or equal to 30 nm).

In this specification and the like, a material that transmits visiblelight and has conductivity is preferably used for the electrode 103 andthe conductive film 106 (the conductive film 106R, the conductive film106G, and the conductive film 106B). Examples of the material include,in addition to the above-described oxide conductor layer typified by anITO, an oxide semiconductor layer and an organic conductor layercontaining an organic substance. Examples of the organic conductivelayer containing an organic substance include a layer containing acomposite material in which an organic material (acceptor material) andan electron donor (donor material) are mixed and a layer containing acomposite material in which an organic material (donor material) and anelectron acceptor (acceptor material) are mixed. The resistivity of thetransparent conductive film is preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁵Ω·cm, further preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁴ Ω·cm.

As the method for forming the electrode 101, the electrode 102, and theelectrode 103 (the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode103B), a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a printing method, acoating method, a molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, a CVD method, apulsed laser deposition method, an atomic layer deposition (ALD) method,or the like can be used as appropriate.

<<Substrate>>

A light-emitting device in one embodiment of the present invention maybe formed over a substrate of glass, plastic, or the like. As the way ofstacking layers over the substrate, layers may be sequentially stackedfrom the electrode 101 side or sequentially stacked from the electrode102 side.

For the substrate over which the light-emitting device of one embodimentof the present invention can be formed, glass, quartz, plastic, or thelike can be used, for example. Alternatively, a flexible substrate canbe used. The flexible substrate is a substrate that can be bent, such asa plastic substrate made of polycarbonate or polyarylate, for example. Afilm, an inorganic film formed by evaporation, or the like can also beused. Another material may be used as long as the substrate functions asa support in a manufacturing process of the light-emitting device or theoptical element. Another material having a function of protecting thelight-emitting device or the optical element may be used.

In this specification and the like, a light-emitting device can beformed using any of a variety of substrates, for example. The type of asubstrate is not limited particularly. Examples of the substrate includea semiconductor substrate (e.g., a single crystal substrate or a siliconsubstrate), an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, aplastic substrate, a metal substrate, a stainless steel substrate, asubstrate including stainless steel foil, a tungsten substrate, asubstrate including tungsten foil, a flexible substrate, an attachmentfilm, cellulose nanofiber (CNF) and paper which include a fibrousmaterial, a base material film, and the like. As an example of a glasssubstrate, a barium borosilicate glass substrate, an aluminoborosilicateglass substrate, a soda lime glass substrate, or the like can be given.Examples of the flexible substrate, the attachment film, the basematerial film, and the like are substrates of plastics typified bypolyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN),polyether sulfone (PES), and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). Anotherexample is a resin such as acrylic. Alternatively, polypropylene,polyester, polyvinyl fluoride, polyvinyl chloride, or the like can beused. Alternatively, polyamide, polyimide, aramid, epoxy, an inorganicvapor deposition film, paper, or the like can be used. Specifically, theuse of semiconductor substrates, single crystal substrates, SOIsubstrates, or the like enables the manufacture of small-sizedtransistors with a small variation in characteristics, size, shape, orthe like and with high current capability. A circuit using suchtransistors achieves lower power consumption of the circuit or higherintegration of the circuit.

Alternatively, a flexible substrate may be used as the substrate, and atransistor or a light-emitting device may be provided directly on theflexible substrate. Further alternatively, a separation layer may beprovided between the substrate and the light-emitting device. Theseparation layer can be used when part or the whole of a light-emittingdevice formed over the separation layer is separated from the substrateand transferred onto another substrate. In such a case, thelight-emitting device can be transferred to a substrate having low heatresistance or a flexible substrate as well. For the above separationlayer, a stack including inorganic films, which are a tungsten film anda silicon oxide film, or a structure in which a resin film of polyimideor the like is formed over a substrate can be used, for example.

In other words, after the light-emitting device is formed using asubstrate, the light-emitting device may be transferred to anothersubstrate. Examples of a substrate to which the light-emitting device istransferred include, in addition to the above-described substrates, acellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a clothsubstrate (including a natural fiber (e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp), asynthetic fiber (e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester), a regeneratedfiber (e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester, or thelike), a leather substrate, and a rubber substrate. When such asubstrate is used, a light-emitting device with high durability, highheat resistance, reduced weight, or reduced thickness can be formed.

The light-emitting device may be formed over an electrode electricallyconnected to a field-effect transistor (FET), for example, which isformed over any of the above-described substrates. Accordingly, anactive matrix display device in which the FET controls the driving ofthe light-emitting device can be manufactured.

<Method for Fabricating Light-Emitting Device>

Next, a method for manufacturing a light-emitting device of oneembodiment of the present invention will be described below withreference to FIGS. 12A to 12C and FIGS. 13A to 13C. Here, a method formanufacturing the light-emitting device 250 illustrated in FIG. 8 willbe described.

FIGS. 12A to 12C and FIGS. 13A to 13C are cross-sectional views forexplaining the manufacturing method of the light-emitting device of oneembodiment of the present invention.

The method for manufacturing the light-emitting device 250 describedbelow includes first to seventh steps.

<<First Step>>

In the first step, part of electrodes (specifically, the conductive film108 and the conductive film 104 included in the electrode 103R, theelectrode 103G, and the electrode 103B) of the light-emitting device isformed over the substrate 200 (see FIG. 12A).

In this embodiment, a transmissive conductive film and a reflectiveconductive film are sequentially formed over the substrate 200 andprocessed into a desired shape; whereby the conductive films 108 and 104are formed. As the transmissive conductive film and the reflectiveconductive film, for example, ITSO and an alloy film of silver,palladium, and copper (also referred to as Ag—Pd—Cu film or APC film)are used, respectively. The conductive films 108 and 104 are preferablyformed and processed through one process in the above manner because themanufacturing cost can be reduced.

Note that a transistor may be formed over the substrate 200 before thefirst step. The transistor and the conductive film 108 may beelectrically connected to each other.

<<Second Step>>

In the second step, a conductive film that is to be the electrode 102over the substrate 200, the conductive film 106R over the conductivefilm 104 included in the electrode 103R, the conductive film 106G overthe conductive film 104 included in the electrode 103G, and theconductive film 106B over the conductive film 104 included in theelectrode 103B are formed. The conductive films 106R, 106G, and the 106Bare formed over the conductive film 104 formed in the first step,whereby the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode 103Bare formed. In this embodiment, an ITSO film is used for the conductivefilm that is to be the electrode 102, the conductive film 106R, theconductive film 106G, and the conductive film 106B (see FIG. 12B).

Note that the conductive film that is to be the electrode 102, theconductive film 106R, the conductive film 106G, and the conductive film106B may be formed separately through a plurality of steps in the secondstep. When the electrode 102 and the conductive films are formed througha plurality of steps, the conductive film 106R, the conductive film106G, and the conductive film 106B can be formed to have thicknessessuitable for the respective light-emitting elements with a microcavitystructure.

Alternatively, the electrode 102 may be formed concurrently with any oneor a plurality of the conductive film 108, the conductive film 106R, theconductive film 106G, and the conductive film 106B through one step orthe plurality of steps.

<<Third Step>>

In the third step, the partition wall 145 that covers end portions ofthe electrodes of the light-emitting device is formed (see FIG. 12C).

The partition wall 145 includes an opening overlapping with theelectrode. The conductive film exposed by the opening functions as theanode of the light-emitting device. As the partition wall 145, apolyimide-based resin is used in this embodiment.

In the first to third steps, since there is no possibility of damagingthe EL layer (a layer containing an organic compound), a variety of filmformation methods and micromachining technologies can be employed. Inthis embodiment, after the transmissive and reflective conductive filmsare formed by a sputtering method, a pattern of the conductive films areformed by a lithography method, and then the conductive film isprocessed into island shapes by a wet etching method to form theelectrodes 102, 103R, 103G, and 103B.

<<Fourth Step>>

In the fourth step, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transportlayer 112, the light-emitting layer 120, the electron-transport layer113, the electron-injection layer 114, and the charge-generation layer115 are formed (see FIG. 13A).

The hole-injection layer 111 can be formed by co-evaporating ahole-transport material and a material containing an acceptor substance.Note that co-evaporation is an evaporation method in which a pluralityof different substances is concurrently vaporized from differentevaporation sources.

Note that the hole-injection layer 111 may be formed through a pluralityof steps. When the hole-injection layer 111 is formed in a plurality ofsteps, is can be formed to have a thickness which enables light-emittingelements to have a microcavity structure.

The hole-transport layer 112 can be formed by evaporating ahole-transport material.

The light-emitting layer 120 can be formed by evaporating the firstlight-emitting material that emits light having a wavelength for atleast one color selected from violet, blue, and blue green. As the firstlight-emitting material, a fluorescent organic compound can be used. Thefluorescent organic compound may be evaporated alone or the fluorescentorganic compound mixed with another material may be evaporated. Forexample, the fluorescent organic compound may be used as a guestmaterial, and the guest material may be dispersed into a host materialhaving higher excitation energy than the guest material and evaporated.

The electron-transport layer 113 can be formed by evaporating asubstance having a high electron-transport property. Theelectron-injection layer 114 can be formed by evaporating a substancehaving a high electron-injection property.

The charge-generation layer 115 can be formed by evaporating a materialobtained by adding an electron acceptor (acceptor) to a hole-transportmaterial or a material obtained by adding an electron donor (donor) toan electron-transport material.

<<Fifth Step>>

In the fifth step, the hole-injection layer 116, the hole-transportlayer 117, the light-emitting layer 140, the electron-transport layer118, the electron-injection layer 119, and the electrode 101 are formed(see FIG. 13B).

The hole-injection layer 116 can be formed by using a material and amethod which are similar to those of the hole-injection layer 111. Thehole-transport layer 117 can be formed by using a material and a methodwhich are similar to those of the hole-transport layer 112.

The light-emitting layer 140 can be formed by evaporating a secondlight-emitting material that emits light having a wavelength for atleast one color selected from green, yellow green, yellow, orange, andred. As the second light-emitting material, a phosphorescent organiccompound can be used. The phosphorescent organic compound may beevaporated alone or the phosphorescent organic compound mixed withanother material may be evaporated. For example, the phosphorescentorganic compound may be used as a guest material, and the guest materialmay be dispersed into a host material having higher excitation energythan the guest material and evaporated. The light-emitting layer 140 mayhave a two-layer structure. In such a case, the two light-emittinglayers each preferably contain a light-emitting material that emitslight of a different color.

The electron-transport layer 118 can be formed by evaporating asubstance having a high electron-transport property. Theelectron-injection layer 119 can be formed by evaporating a substancehaving a high electron-injection property.

The electrode 101 can be formed using a reflective conductive film. Theelectrode 101 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure.

Through the above step, the light-emitting device including thelight-emitting element 222W over the electrode 102, the light-emittingelement 222R over the electrode 103R, the light-emitting element 222Gover the electrode 103G, and the light-emitting element 222B over theelectrode 103B is formed over the substrate 200.

<<Sixth Step>>

In the sixth step, the light-blocking layer 223, the optical element224R, the optical element 224G, and the optical element 224B are formedover the substrate 220 (see FIG. 13C).

As the light-blocking layer 223, a resin film containing black pigmentis formed in a desired region. Then, the optical element 224R, theoptical element 224G, and the optical element 224B are formed over thesubstrate 220 and the light-blocking layer 223. As the optical element224R, a resin film containing red pigment is formed in a desired region.As the optical element 224G, a resin film containing green pigment isformed in a desired region. As the optical element 224B, a resin filmcontaining blue pigment is formed in a desired region.

<<Seventh Step>>

In the seventh step, the light-emitting element formed over thesubstrate 200 is attached to the light-blocking layer 223, the opticalelement 224R, the optical element 224G, and the optical element 224Bformed over the substrate 220, and sealed with a sealant (notillustrated).

Through the above-described steps, the light-emitting device 250illustrated in FIG. 8 can be formed.

In Embodiment 1, one embodiment of the present invention has beendescribed. Other embodiments of the present invention are described inEmbodiments 2 to 9. Note that one embodiment of the present invention isnot limited to the above examples. In other words, various embodimentsof the invention are described in this embodiment and the otherembodiments, and one embodiment of the present invention is not limitedto a particular embodiment. The example in which one embodiment of thepresent invention is applied to the light-emitting device is described;however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto.For example, depending on circumstances or conditions, one embodiment ofthe present invention is not necessarily used in a light-emittingdevice. For example, this embodiment shows the following example. Thefirst light-emitting element includes the light-emitting layer and thefirst and second electrodes; the second light-emitting element includesthe light-emitting layer and the first and third electrodes; the secondelectrode includes only the first conductive film; the third electrodeincludes the second conductive film and the third conductive film; thefirst electrode has a function of reflecting light; the first conductivefilm and the third conductive film have a function of transmittinglight; and the second conductive film has functions of reflecting lightand transmitting light. However, one embodiment of the present inventionis not limited to this example. Depending on circumstances orconditions, for example, the second light-emitting element does notnecessarily include the second conductive film or the third conductivefilm in one embodiment of the present invention. Alternatively, thefirst light-emitting element may include the second conductive film orthe third conductive film. The light-emitting layers may be formed by aseparate coloring method.

The structure described above in this embodiment can be combined withany of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 2

In this embodiment, a light-emitting element that can be employed forthe light-emitting device described in Embodiment 1 and light emissionmechanisms of the light-emitting element will be described below withreference to FIGS. 14A to 14C, FIGS. 15A and 15B, and FIGS. 16A to 16C.In FIGS. 14A to 14C, FIGS. 15A and 15B, and FIGS. 16A to 16C, a portionhaving a function similar to that in FIGS. 1 to 13 is represented by thesame hatch pattern as in FIGS. 1 to 13 and not especially denoted by areference numeral in some cases. In addition, common reference numeralsare used for portions having similar functions, and a detaileddescription of the portions is omitted in some cases.

Structure Example 1 of Light-Emitting Element

FIG. 14A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting element260.

The light-emitting element 260 illustrated in FIG. 14A includes aplurality of light-emitting units (the light-emitting unit 208 and thelight-emitting unit 210 in FIG. 14A) between a pair of electrodes (anelectrode 201 and an electrode 202). One of light-emitting unitspreferably has the same structure as the EL layer 100. Note that theelectrode 201 functions as an anode and the electrode 202 functions as acathode in the following description of the light-emitting element 260;however, the functions may be interchanged in the light-emitting element260. For the electrode 202, the structure of the electrode 102 or theelectrode 103 (the electrode 103R, the electrode 103G, and the electrode103B) described in Embodiment 1 may be employed. For the electrode 201,the structure of the electrode 101 described in Embodiment 1 may beemployed.

In the light-emitting element 260 illustrated in FIG. 14A, thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210 are stacked, andthe charge-generation layer 115 is provided between the light-emittingunit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210. Note that the light-emittingunit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210 may have the same structure ordifferent structures.

The light-emitting element 260 includes the light-emitting layer 120 andthe light-emitting layer 140. The light-emitting unit 208 includes thehole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, theelectron-transport layer 113, and the electron-injection layer 114 inaddition to the light-emitting layer 120. The light-emitting unit 210includes the hole-injection layer 116, the hole-transport layer 117, theelectron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 inaddition to the light-emitting layer 140.

Note that when a surface of a light-emitting unit on the anode side isin contact with the charge-generation layer 115, the charge-generationlayer 115 can also serve as a hole-injection layer or a hole-transportlayer of the light-emitting unit; thus, a hole-injection layer or ahole-transport layer is not necessarily included in the light-emittingunit. Alternatively, when a surface of the light-emitting unit on thecathode side is in contact with the charge-generation layer 115, thecharge-generation layer 115 can also serve as an electron-injectionlayer or an electron-transport layer of the light-emitting unit; thus,an electron-injection layer or an electron-transport layer is notnecessarily included in the light-emitting unit.

The charge-generation layer 115 provided between the light-emitting unit208 and the light-emitting unit 210 may have any structure as long aselectrons can be injected to the light-emitting unit on one side andholes can be injected into the light-emitting unit on the other sidewhen a voltage is applied between the electrode 201 and the electrode202. For example, in FIG. 14A, the charge-generation layer 115 injectselectrons into the light-emitting unit 208 and holes into thelight-emitting unit 210 when a voltage is applied such that thepotential of the electrode 202 is higher than that of the electrode 201.

The light-emitting element having two light-emitting units has beendescribed with reference to FIG. 14A; however, a similar structure canbe applied to a light-emitting element in which three or morelight-emitting units are stacked. With a plurality of light-emittingunits partitioned by the charge-generation layer between a pair ofelectrodes as in the light-emitting element 260, it is possible toprovide a light-emitting element which can emit light with highluminance with the current density kept low and has a long lifetime. Inaddition, a light-emitting element with low power consumption can beachieved.

The light-emitting layer 120 included in the light-emitting unit 208contains a host material 121 and a guest material 122 as illustrated inFIG. 14B. Note that the guest material 122 is described below as afluorescent compound. The light-emitting layer 140 included in thelight-emitting unit 210 includes a host material 141 and a guestmaterial 142 as illustrated in FIG. 15A. The host material 141 includesan organic compound 141_1 and an organic compound 141_2. In thefollowing description, the guest material 142 included in thelight-emitting layer 140 is a phosphorescent compound.

<<Light Emission Mechanism of Light-Emitting Layer 120>>

The light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 120 isdescribed below.

By recombination of the electrons and holes injected from the pair ofelectrodes (the electrode 201 and the electrode 202) or thecharge-generation layer 115 in the light-emitting layer 120, excitonsare formed. Because the amount of the host materials 121 is larger thanthat of the guest materials 122, most of the excited states formed bythe exciton generation are those of the host material 121.

Note that the term “exciton” refers to a carrier (electron and hole)pair. Since excitons have energy, a material where excitons aregenerated is brought into an excited state.

In the case where the formed excited state of the host material 121 is asinglet excited state, singlet excitation energy transfers from the S1level of the host material 121 to the S1 level of the guest material122, thereby forming the singlet excited state of the guest material122.

Since the guest material 122 is a fluorescent compound, when a singletexcited state is formed in the guest material 122, the guest material122 immediately emits light. To obtain high luminous efficiency in thiscase, the fluorescence quantum yield of the guest material 122 ispreferably high. The same can apply to a case where a singlet excitedstate is formed by recombination of carriers in the guest material 122.

Next, a case where recombination of carriers forms a triplet excitedstate of the host material 121 is described. The correlation between theenergy levels of the host material 121 and the guest material 122 inthis case is shown in FIG. 14C. The following explains what terms andsigns in FIG. 14C represent. Note that because it is preferable that theT1 level of the host material 121 be lower than the T1 level of theguest material 122, FIG. 14C shows this preferable case. However, the T1level of the host material 121 may be higher than the T1 level of theguest material 122.

FIG. 14C illustrates the correlation of energy levels of the hostmaterial 121 and the guest material 122 in the light-emitting layer 120.The following explains what terms and signs in FIG. 14C represent:

Host (121): the host material 121;

Guest (122): the guest material 122 (the fluorescent compound);

S_(FH): the S1 level of the host material 121;

T_(FH): the T1 level of the host material 121;

S_(FG): the S1 level of the guest material 122 (the fluorescentcompound); and

T_(FG): the T1 level of the guest material 122 (the fluorescentcompound).

As illustrated in FIG. 14C, triplet-triplet annihilation (TTA) occurs,that is, triplet excitons formed by carrier recombination interact witheach other, and excitation energy is transferred and spin angularmomenta are exchanged; as a result, a reaction in which the tripletexcitons are converted into singlet excitons having energy of the S1level of the host material 121 (S_(FH)) is caused (see TTA in FIG. 14C).The singlet excitation energy of the host material 121 is transferredfrom S_(FH) to the S1 level of the guest material 122 (S_(FG)) having alower energy than S_(FH) (see Route E₅ in FIG. 14C), and a singletexcited state of the guest material 122 is formed, whereby the guestmaterial 122 emits light.

Note that in the case where the density of triplet excitons in thelight-emitting layer 120 is sufficiently high (e.g., 1×10¹² cm⁻³ orhigher), only the reaction of two triplet excitons close to each othercan be considered whereas deactivation of a single triplet exciton canbe ignored.

In the case where a triplet excited state of the guest material 122 isformed by carrier recombination, the triplet excited state of the guestmaterial 122 is thermally deactivated and is difficult to use for lightemission. However, in the case where the T1 level of the host material121 (T_(FH)) is lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122(T_(FG)), the triplet excitation energy of the guest material 122 can betransferred from the T1 level of the guest material 122 (T_(FG)) to theT1 level of the host material 121 (T_(FH)) (see Route E₆ in FIG. 14C)and then is utilized for TTA.

In other words, the host material 121 preferably has a function ofconverting triplet excitation energy into singlet excitation energy bycausing TTA, so that the triplet excitation energy generated in thelight-emitting layer 120 can be partly converted into singlet excitationenergy by TTA in the host material 121. The singlet excitation energycan be transferred to the guest material 122 and extracted asfluorescence. In order to achieve this, the S1 level of the hostmaterial 121 (S_(FH)) is preferably higher than the S1 level of theguest material 122 (S_(FG)). In addition, the T1 level of the hostmaterial 121 (T_(FH)) is preferably lower than the T1 level of the guestmaterial 122 (T_(FG)).

Note that particularly in the case where the T1 level (T_(FG)) of theguest material 122 is lower than the T1 level (T_(FH)) of the hostmaterial 121, the weight ratio of the guest material 122 to the hostmaterial 121 is preferably low. Specifically, the weight ratio of theguest material 122 to the host material 121 is preferably greater than 0and less than or equal to 0.05, in which case the probability of carrierrecombination in the guest material 122 can be reduced. In addition, theprobability of energy transfer from the T1 level of the host material121 (T_(FH)) to the T1 level of the guest material 122 (T_(FG)) can bereduced.

Note that the host material 121 may be composed of a single compound ora plurality of compounds.

<<Light Emission Mechanism of Light-Emitting Layer 140>>

Next, the light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 140 isdescribed below.

The organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 1412 which areincluded in the light-emitting layer 140 preferably form an exciplex.

Although it is acceptable as long as the combination of the organiccompound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 can form an exciplex, itis preferable that one of them be a compound having a hole-transportproperty and the other be a compound having an electron-transportproperty.

FIG. 15B illustrates the correlation of energy levels of the organiccompound 1411, the organic compound 1412, and the guest material 142 inthe light-emitting layer 140. The following explains what terms andsigns in FIG. 15B represent:

Host (141_1): the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

Host (141_2): the organic compound 141_2 (host material);

Guest (142): the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound);

S_(PH1): the S1 level of the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

T_(PH1): the T1 level of the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

S_(PH2): the S1 level of the organic compound 141_2 (host material);

T_(PH2): the T1 level of the organic compound 141_2 (host material);

T_(PG): the T1 level of the guest material 142 (the phosphorescentcompound);

S_(PE): the S1 level of the exciplex; and

T_(PE): the T1 level of the exciplex.

The organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 form anexciplex, and the S1 level (S_(PE)) and the T1 level (T_(PE)) of theexciplex are energy levels close to each other (see Route E₇ in FIG.15B).

One of the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2receives a hole and the other receives an electron to readily form anexciplex. Alternatively, one of the organic compounds brought into anexcited state immediately interacts with the other organic compound toform an exciplex. Therefore, most excitons in the light-emitting layer140 exist as excited complexes. Because the excitation energy levels(S_(PE) and T_(PE)) of the exciplex are lower than the S1 levels(S_(PH1) and S_(PH2)) of the host materials (the organic compounds 141_1and 141_2) that form the exciplex, the excited state of the hostmaterial 141 can be formed with lower excitation energy. This can reducethe driving voltage of the light-emitting element.

Both energies of S_(PE) and T_(PE) of the exciplex are then transferredto the T1 level of the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound);thus, light emission is obtained (see Routes E₈ and E₉ in FIG. 15B).

Furthermore, the T1 level (T_(PE)) of the exciplex is preferably higherthan the T1 level (T_(PG)) of the guest material 142. In this way, thesinglet excitation energy and the triplet excitation energy of theformed exciplex can be transferred from the S1 level (S_(PE)) and the T1level (T_(PE)) of the exciplex to the T1 level (T_(PG)) of the guestmaterial 142.

Note that in order to efficiently transfer excitation energy from theexciplex to the guest material 142, the T1 level (T_(PE)) of theexciplex is preferably lower than or equal to the T1 levels (T_(PH1) andT_(PH2)) of the organic compounds (the organic compound 141_1 and theorganic compound 141_2) which form the exciplex. Thus, quenching of thetriplet excitation energy of the exciplex due to the organic compounds(the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2) is less likely to occur,resulting in efficient energy transfer from the exciplex to the guestmaterial 142.

In order that the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2efficiently form an exciplex, it is preferable to satisfy the following:the HOMO level of one of the organic compound 141_1 and the organiccompound 141_2 is higher than that of the other and the LUMO level ofthe one of the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 ishigher than that of the other. For example, when the organic compound141_1 has a hole-transport property and the organic compound 141_2 hasan electron-transport property, it is preferable that the HOMO level ofthe organic compound 141_1 be higher than the HOMO level of the organiccompound 141_2 and the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_1 behigher than the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_2. Alternatively,when the organic compound 141_2 has a hole-transport property and theorganic compound 141_1 has an electron-transport property, it ispreferable that the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_2 be higherthan the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_1 and the LUMO level ofthe organic compound 141_2 be higher than the LUMO level of the organiccompound 141_1. Specifically, the energy difference between the HOMOlevel of the organic compound 141_1 and the HOMO level of the organiccompound 141_2 is preferably greater than or equal to 0.05 eV, furtherpreferably greater than or equal to 0.1 eV, and still further preferablygreater than or equal to 0.2 eV. Alternatively, the energy differencebetween the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_1 and the LUMO levelof the organic compound 141_2 is preferably greater than or equal to0.05 eV, further preferably greater than or equal to 0.1 eV, and stillfurther preferably greater than or equal to 0.2 eV.

In the case where the combination of the organic compounds 141_1 and141_2 is a combination of a compound having a hole-transport propertyand a compound having an electron-transport property, the carrierbalance can be easily controlled depending on the mixture ratio.Specifically, the weight ratio of the compound having a hole-transportproperty to the compound having an electron-transport property ispreferably within a range of 1:9 to 9:1. Since the carrier balance canbe easily controlled with the structure, a carrier recombination regioncan also be controlled easily.

<Energy Transfer Mechanism>

Next, factors controlling the processes of intermolecular energytransfer between the host material 141 and the guest material 142 willbe described. As mechanisms of the intermolecular energy transfer, twomechanisms, i.e., Forster mechanism (dipole-dipole interaction) andDexter mechanism (electron exchange interaction), have been proposed.Although the intermolecular energy transfer process between the hostmaterial 141 and the guest material 142 is described here, the same canapply to a case where the host material 141 is an exciplex.

<<Förster Mechanism>>

In Förster mechanism, energy transfer does not require direct contactbetween molecules and energy is transferred through a resonantphenomenon of dipolar oscillation between the host material 141 and theguest material 142. By the resonant phenomenon of dipolar oscillation,the host material 141 provides energy to the guest material 142, andthus, the host material 141 in an excited state is brought to a groundstate and the guest material 142 in a ground state is brought to anexcited state. Note that the rate constant k_(h*→g) of Forster mechanismis expressed by Formula 1.

$\begin{matrix}{k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g} = {\frac{9000c^{4}K^{2}{\phi ln10}}{128\pi^{5}n^{4}N\tau R^{6}}{\int{\frac{f^{\prime}h^{{(v)}ɛ}g^{(v)}}{v^{4}}{dv}}}}} & \left\lbrack {{Formula}\mspace{25mu} 1} \right\rbrack\end{matrix}$

In Formula (1), v denotes a frequency, f′_(h)(v) denotes a normalizedemission spectrum of the host material 141 (a fluorescent spectrum inenergy transfer from a singlet excited state, and a phosphorescentspectrum in energy transfer from a triplet excited state), ε_(g)(v)denotes a molar absorption coefficient of the guest material 142, Ndenotes Avogadro's number, n denotes a refractive index of a medium, Rdenotes an intermolecular distance between the host material 141 and theguest material 142, τ denotes a measured lifetime of an excited state(fluorescence lifetime or phosphorescence lifetime), c denotes the speedof light, ϕ denotes a luminescence quantum yield (a fluorescence quantumyield in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and aphosphorescence quantum yield in energy transfer from a triplet excitedstate), and K² denotes a coefficient (0 to 4) of orientation of atransition dipole moment between the host material 141 and the guestmaterial 142. Note that K²=2/3 in random orientation.

<<Dexter Mechanism>>

In Dexter mechanism, the host material 141 and the guest material 142are close to a contact effective range where their orbitals overlap, andthe host material 141 in an excited state and the guest material 142 ina ground state exchange their electrons, which leads to energy transfer.Note that the rate constant k_(h*→g) of Dexter mechanism is expressed byFormula 2.

$\begin{matrix}{k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g} = {\left( \frac{2\pi}{h} \right)K^{2}{\exp\left( {- \frac{2R}{L}} \right)}{\int{f^{\prime}h^{{(v)}ɛ^{\prime}}g^{(v)}{dv}}}}} & \left\lbrack {{Formula}\mspace{25mu} 2} \right\rbrack\end{matrix}$

In Formula (2), h denotes a Planck constant, K denotes a constant havingan energy dimension, v denotes a frequency, f′_(h)(v) denotes anormalized emission spectrum of the host material 141 (a fluorescentspectrum in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and aphosphorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a triplet excitedstate), ε′_(g)(v) denotes a normalized absorption spectrum of the guestmaterial 142, L denotes an effective molecular radius, and R denotes anintermolecular distance between the host material 141 and the guestmaterial 142.

Here, the efficiency of energy transfer from the host material 141 tothe guest material 142 (energy transfer efficiency ϕ_(ET)) is expressedby Formula (3). In the formula, k_(r) denotes a rate constant of alight-emission process (fluorescence in energy transfer from a singletexcited state, and phosphorescence in energy transfer from a tripletexcited state) of the host material 141, k_(n) denotes a rate constantof a non-light-emission process (thermal deactivation or intersystemcrossing) of the host material 141, and τ denotes a measured lifetime ofan excited state of the host material 141.

$\begin{matrix}{\phi_{ET} = {\frac{k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}}{k_{r} + k_{n} + k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}} = \frac{k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}}{\left( \frac{1}{\tau} \right) + k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}}}} & \left\lbrack {{Formula}\mspace{25mu} 3} \right\rbrack\end{matrix}$

According to Formula 3, it is found that the energy transfer efficiencyϕ_(ET) can be increased by increasing the rate constant k_(h*→g) ofenergy transfer so that another competing rate constant k_(r)+k_(n)(=1/τ) becomes relatively small.

<<Concept for Promoting Energy Transfer>>

In energy transfer by Forster mechanism, high energy transfer efficiencyϕ_(ET) is obtained when quantum yield ϕ (a fluorescence quantum yield inthe case where energy transfer from a singlet excited state isdiscussed, and a phosphorescence quantum yield in the case where energytransfer from a triplet excited state is discussed) is high.Furthermore, it is preferable that the emission spectrum (thefluorescence spectrum in the case where energy transfer from the singletexcited state is discussed) of the host material 141 largely overlapwith the absorption spectrum (absorption corresponding to the transitionfrom the singlet ground state to the triplet excited state) of the guestmaterial 142. It is preferable that the molar absorption coefficient ofthe guest material 142 be also high. This means that the emissionspectrum of the host material 141 overlaps with the absorption band ofthe guest material 142 which is on the longest wavelength side.

In energy transfer by Dexter mechanism, in order to make the rateconstant k_(h*→g) large, it is preferable that the emission spectrum (afluorescence spectrum in the case where energy transfer from a singletexcited state is discussed, and a phosphorescence spectrum in the casewhere energy transfer from a triplet excited state is discussed) of thehost material 141 largely overlap with the absorption spectrum(absorption corresponding to transition from a singlet ground state to atriplet excited state) of the guest material 142. Therefore, the energytransfer efficiency can be optimized by making the emission spectrum ofthe host material 141 overlap with the absorption band of the guestmaterial 142 which is on the longest wavelength side.

In a manner similar to that of the energy transfer from the hostmaterial 141 to the guest material 142, the energy transfer by bothForster mechanism and Dexter mechanism also occurs in the energytransfer process from the exciplex to the guest material 142.

That is, the host material 141 includes the organic compounds 141_1 and141_2 which are a combination for forming an exciplex functioning as anenergy donor capable of efficiently transferring energy to the guestmaterial 142. The excitation energy for forming the exciplex by theorganic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 can be lower thanthe excitation energy of the organic compound 141_1 in the excited stateand lower than the excitation energy of the organic compound 141_2 inthe excited state. Therefore, driving voltage of the light emittingelement can be reduced.

Furthermore, in order to facilitate the energy transfer from the S1level of the exciplex to the T1 level of the guest material 142 servingas an energy acceptor, it is preferable that the emission spectrum ofthe exciplex overlap with the absorption band of the guest material 142which is on the longest wavelength side (lowest energy side). Thus, theefficiency of generating the triplet excited state of the guest material142 can be increased.

The exciplex generated in the light-emitting layer 140 has a feature inthat the singlet excitation energy level is close to the tripletexcitation energy level. Therefore, by overlapping the emission spectrumof the exciplex and the absorption band of the guest material 142 whichis on the longest wavelength side (lowest energy side), energy transferfrom the triplet excitation energy level of the exciplex to the tripletexcitation energy level of the guest material 142 can be facilitated.

When the light-emitting layer 140 has the above-described structure,light emission from the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound)of the light-emitting layer 140 can be obtained efficiently.

Note that the above-described processes through Routes E₇, E₈, and E₉may be referred to as exciplex-triplet energy transfer (ExTET) in thisspecification and the like. In other words, in the light-emitting layer140, excitation energy is given from the exciplex to the guest material142. In this case, the efficiency of reverse intersystem crossing fromT_(PE) to S_(PE) and the emission quantum yield from S_(PE) are notnecessarily high; thus, materials can be selected from a wide range ofoptions.

Note that in each of the above-described structures, the emission colorsof the guest materials used in the light-emitting unit 208 and thelight-emitting unit 210 may be the same or different. In the case whereguest materials emitting light of the same color are used for thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210, thelight-emitting element 260 can exhibit high emission luminance at asmall current value, which is preferable. In the case where guestmaterials emitting light of different colors are used for thelight-emitting unit 208 and the light-emitting unit 210, thelight-emitting element 260 can exhibit multi-color light emission, whichis preferable. In that case, when a plurality of light-emittingmaterials with different emission wavelengths are used in one or both ofthe light-emitting layers 120 and 140, the light-emitting element 260emits light obtained by synthesizing lights with different emissionpeaks. That is, the emission spectrum of the light-emitting element 260has at least two local maximum values.

The above structure is also suitable for obtaining white light emission.When the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 emitlight of complementary colors, white light emission can be obtained. Itis particularly favorable to select the guest materials so that whitelight emission with high color rendering properties or light emission ofat least red, green, and blue can be obtained.

In the case where the light-emitting units 208 and 210 contain guestmaterials whose emission colors are different, light emitted from thelight-emitting layer 120 preferably has an emission peak on the shorterwavelength side than light emitted from the light-emitting layer 140.The luminance of a light-emitting element using a material having a hightriplet excited energy level tends to degrade quickly. TTA is utilizedin the light-emitting layer emitting light with a short wavelength sothat a light-emitting element with less degradation of luminance can beprovided.

At least one of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 may be furtherdivided into layers and the divided layers may contain differentlight-emitting materials. That is, at least one of the light-emittinglayers 120 and 140 may consist of two or more layers. For example, inthe case where the light-emitting layer is formed by stacking a firstlight-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer in this orderfrom the hole-transport layer side, the first light-emitting layer isformed using a material having a hole-transport property as the hostmaterial and the second light-emitting layer is formed using a materialhaving an electron-transport property as the host material. In thatcase, a light-emitting material included in the first light-emittinglayer may be the same as or different from a light-emitting materialincluded in the second light-emitting layer. In addition, the materialsmay have functions of emitting light of the same color or light ofdifferent colors. White light emission with a high color renderingproperty that is formed of three primary colors or four or more colorscan be obtained by using a plurality of light-emitting materialsemitting light of different colors.

Structural Example 2 of Light-Emitting Element

Next, a structure example different from that of the light-emittingelements illustrated in FIGS. 14A to 14C and FIGS. 15A and 15B will bedescribed below with reference to FIGS. 16A to 16C.

FIG. 16A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting element262.

In the light-emitting element 262 shown in FIG. 16A, the EL layer 100 isprovided between a pair of electrodes (the electrodes 201 and 202). Notethat the electrode 202 functions as an anode and the electrode 201functions as a cathode in the following description of thelight-emitting element 262; however, the functions may be interchangedin the light-emitting element 262. For the electrode 202, the structureof the electrode 102 or the electrode 103 (the electrode 103R, theelectrode 103G, and the electrode 103B) may be used. For the electrode201, the structure of the electrode 101 shown in Embodiment 1 may beused.

The EL layer 100 includes the light-emitting layer 130. Thelight-emitting layer 130 includes the light-emitting layer 120 and thelight-emitting layer 140. In the light-emitting element 262, as the ELlayer 100, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112,the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119are illustrated in addition to the light-emitting layers. However, thisstacked structure is an example, and the structure of the EL layer 100in the light-emitting element 262 is not limited thereto. For example,the stacking order of the above layers of the EL layer 100 may bechanged. Alternatively, in the EL layer 100, another functional layerother than the above layers may be provided. The functional layer mayhave a function of lowering a hole- or electron-injection barrier, afunction of improving a hole- or electron-transport property, a functionof inhibiting transport of holes or electrons, or a function ofproducing holes or electrons, for example.

As illustrated in FIG. 16B, the light-emitting layer 120 contains thehost material 121 and the guest material 122. The light-emitting layer140 contains the host material 141 and the guest material 142. The hostmaterial 141 includes the organic compound 141_1 and the organiccompound 141_2. Note that in the description below, the guest material122 is a fluorescent compound and the guest material 142 is aphosphorescent compound.

<<Emission Mechanism of Light-Emitting Layer 130>>

The light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 120 is similarto that of the light-emitting layer 120 illustrated in FIGS. 14B and14C. The light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 140 issimilar to that of the light-emitting layer 140 illustrated in FIGS. 15Aand 15B.

In the case where the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 are in contactwith each other as illustrated in FIG. 16A, even when energy (inparticular, triplet excitation level energy) is transferred from theexciplex of the light-emitting layer 140 to the host material 121 of thelight-emitting layer 120 at an interface between the light-emittinglayer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140, triplet excitation energycan be converted into light emission in the light-emitting layer 120.

Note that the T1 level of the host material 121 of the light-emittinglayer 120 is preferably lower than the T1 levels of the organiccompounds 141_1 and 141_2 of the light-emitting layer 140. In thelight-emitting layer 120, the S1 level of the host material 121 ispreferably higher than the S1 level of the guest material 122(fluorescent compound) while the T1 level of the host material 121 ispreferably lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122(fluorescent compound).

FIG. 16C shows a correlation of energy levels in the case where TTA isutilized in the light-emitting layer 120 and ExTET is utilized in thelight-emitting layer 140. The following explains what terms and signs inFIG. 16C represent:

Fluorescence EML (120): the light-emitting layer 120 (the fluorescentlight-emitting layer);

Phosphorescence EML (140): the light-emitting layer 140 (phosphorescentlight-emitting layer);

Host (121): the host material 121;

Guest (122): the guest material 122 (the fluorescent compound);

Host (141_1): the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

Guest (142): the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound);

Exciplex: the exciplex (the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2);

S_(FH): the S1 level the host material 121;

T_(FH): the T1 level of the host material 121;

S_(FG): the S1 level of the guest material 122 (the fluorescentcompound); and

T_(FG): the T1 level of the guest material 122 (the fluorescentcompound).

S_(PH): the S1 level of the host material (the organic compound 141_1);

T_(PH): the T1 level of the host material (the organic compound 1411);

T_(PG): the T1 level of the guest material 142 (the phosphorescentcompound);

S_(E): the S1 level of the exciplex; and

T_(E): the T1 level of the exciplex.

As shown in FIG. 16C, the exciplex exists only in an excited state;thus, exciton diffusion between the exciplexes is less likely to occur.In addition, because the excitation energy levels (S_(E) and T_(E)) ofthe exciplex are lower than the excitation energy levels (S_(PH) andT_(PH)) of the organic compound 141_1 (i.e., the host material of thephosphorescent compound) of the light-emitting layer 140, energydiffusion from the exciplex to the organic compound 141_1 does notoccur. That is, the efficiency of the phosphorescent light-emittinglayer (the light-emitting layer 140) can be maintained because anexciton diffusion distance of the exciplex is short in thephosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 140). Inaddition, even when part of the triplet excitation energy of theexciplex of the phosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emittinglayer 140) diffuses into the fluorescent light-emitting layer (thelight-emitting layer 120) through the interface between the fluorescentlight-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 120) and thephosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 140),energy loss can be reduced because the triplet excitation energy in thefluorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 120) causedby the diffusion is converted into light emission through TTA.

As described above, ExTET is utilized in the light-emitting layer 140and TTA is utilized in the light-emitting layer 120; thus, thelight-emitting element 262 can have a reduced energy loss and a highemission efficiency. Furthermore, in the case where the light-emittinglayer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 are in contact with eachother as in the light-emitting element 262, the number of the EL layers100 as well as the energy loss can be reduced. Therefore, alight-emitting element with low manufacturing cost can be obtained.

Note that the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140are not necessarily in contact with each other. In that case, it ispossible to prevent energy transfer by the Dexter mechanism (inparticular, triplet energy transfer) from the organic compound 141_1 inan excited state, the organic compound 141_2 in an excited state, or theguest material 142 (phosphorescent compound) in an excited state whichis generated in the light-emitting layer 140 to the host material 121 orthe guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) in the light-emittinglayer 120. Therefore, the thickness of a layer provided between thelight-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 may be severalnanometers. Specifically, the thickness is preferably greater than orequal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 5 nm, in which case an increasein driving voltage can be inhibited.

The layer provided between the light-emitting layer 120 and thelight-emitting layer 140 may contain a single material or both ahole-transport material and an electron-transport material. In the caseof a single material, a bipolar material may be used. The bipolarmaterial here refers to a material in which the ratio between theelectron mobility and the hole mobility is 100 or less. Alternatively,the hole-transport material, the electron-transport material, or thelike may be used. At least one of materials contained in the layer maybe the same as the host material (the organic compound 141_1 or 141_2)of the light-emitting layer 140. This facilitates the manufacture of thelight-emitting element and reduces the drive voltage. Furthermore, thehole-transport material and the electron-transport material may form anexciplex, which effectively prevents exciton diffusion. Specifically, itis possible to prevent energy transfer from the host material (theorganic compound 141_1 or 141_2) in an excited state or the guestmaterial 142 (phosphorescent compound) in an excited state of thelight-emitting layer 140 to the host material 121 or the guest material122 (fluorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 120.

In the light-emitting element 262, the light-emitting layer 120 and thelight-emitting layer 140 have been described as being positioned on thehole-transport layer 112 side and the electron-transport layer 118 side,respectively; however, the light-emitting element of one embodiment ofthe present invention is not limited to this structure. Thelight-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 may bepositioned on the electron-transport layer 118 side and thehole-transport layer 112 side, respectively.

In the light-emitting element 262, a carrier recombination region ispreferably distributed to some extent. Therefore, it is preferable thatthe light-emitting layer 120 or 140 have an appropriate degree ofcarrier-trapping property. It is particularly preferable that the guestmaterial 142 (phosphorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 140have an electron-trapping property. Alternatively, the guest material122 (fluorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 120 preferablyhas a hole-trapping property.

Note that light emitted from the light-emitting layer 120 preferably hasa peak on the shorter wavelength side than light emitted from thelight-emitting layer 140. The luminance of a light-emitting elementusing a phosphorescent compound emitting light with a short wavelengthtends to degrade quickly. In view of the above, fluorescence is used forlight emission with a short wavelength, so that a light-emitting elementwith less degradation of luminance can be provided.

Furthermore, the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer140 may be made to emit light with different emission wavelengths, sothat the light-emitting element can be a multicolor light-emittingelement. In that case, the emission spectrum is formed by combininglight having different emission peaks, and thus has at least two peaks.

The above structure is also suitable for obtaining white light emission.When the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 emitlight of complementary colors, white light emission can be obtained.

In addition, white light emission with a high color rendering propertythat is formed of three primary colors or four or more colors can beobtained by using a plurality of light-emitting materials emitting lightof different emission wavelengths for one of the light-emitting layers120 and 140 or both. In that case, the light-emitting layer may bedivided into layers and each of the divided layers may contain adifferent light-emitting material from the others.

<Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layer>

Next, materials that can be used in the light-emitting layers 120 and140 are described.

<<Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layer 120>>

In the light-emitting layer 120, the host material 121 is present in thelargest proportion by weight, and the guest material 122 (thefluorescent compound) is dispersed in the host material 121. The S1level of the host material 121 is preferably higher than the S1 level ofthe guest material 122 (the fluorescent compound) while the T1 level ofthe host material 121 is preferably lower than the T1 level of the guestmaterial 122 (the fluorescent compound).

In the light-emitting layer 120, the guest material 122 is preferably,but not particularly limited to, an anthracene derivative, a tetracenederivative, a chrysene derivative, a phenanthrene derivative, a pyrenederivative, a perylene derivative, a stilbene derivative, an acridonederivative, a coumarin derivative, a phenoxazine derivative, aphenothiazine derivative, or the like. Specifically, the fluorescentcompound described in Embodiment 1 can be used, for example.

Although there is no particular limitation on a material that can beused as the host material 121 in the light-emitting layer 120, any ofthe following materials can be used, for example: metal complexes suchas tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Alq),tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Almq₃),bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium(II) (abbreviation: BeBq₂),bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum(III)(abbreviation: BAlq), bis(8-quinolinolato)zinc(II) (abbreviation: Znq),bis[2-(2-benzoxazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnPBO), andbis[2-(2-benzothiazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnBTZ);heterocyclic compounds such as2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation:PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene(abbreviation: OXD-7),3-(4-biphenylyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole(abbreviation: TAZ),2,2′,2″-(1,3,5-benzenetriyl)-tris(1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole)(abbreviation: TPBI), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen),bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP), and9-[4-(5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation:CO11); and aromatic amine compounds such as4,4′-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB orα-NPD),N,N-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N-diphenyl-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4,4′-diamine(abbreviation: TPD), and4,4′-bis[N-(spiro-9,9′-bifluoren-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl(abbreviation: BSPB). In addition, condensed polycyclic aromaticcompounds such as anthracene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives,pyrene derivatives, chrysene derivatives, and dibenzo[g,p]chrysenederivatives can be given, and specific examples are9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPAnth),N,N-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: CzA1PA), 4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: DPhPA),4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: YGAPA),N,9-diphenyl-N-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: PCAPA),N,9-diphenyl-N-{4-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]phenyl}-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: PCAPBA),N,9-diphenyl-N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-9H-carbazol-3-amine(abbreviation: 2PCAPA), 6,12-dimethoxy-5,11-diphenylchrysene,N,N,N′,N′,N″,N″,N′″,N′″-octaphenyldibenzo[g,p]chrysene-2,7,10,15-tetramine(abbreviation: DBC1), 9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole(abbreviation: CzPA),3,6-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole(abbreviation: DPCzPA), 9,10-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)anthracene(abbreviation: DPPA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DNA),2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA),9,9′-bianthryl (abbreviation: BANT),9,9′-(stilbene-3,3′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS),9,9′-(stilbene-4,4′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS2),1,3,5-tri(1-pyrenyl)benzene (abbreviation: TPB3), and the like. One ormore substances having a wider energy gap than the above-described guestmaterial 122 is/are preferably selected from these and known substances.

The light-emitting layer 120 can have a structure in which two or morelayers are stacked. For example, in the case where the light-emittinglayer 120 is formed by stacking a first light-emitting layer and asecond light-emitting layer in this order from the hole-transport layerside, the first light-emitting layer is formed using a substance havinga hole-transport property as the host material and the secondlight-emitting layer is formed using a substance having anelectron-transport property as the host material.

In the light-emitting layer 120, the host material 121 may be composedof one kind of compound or a plurality of compounds. The light-emittinglayer 120 may include a material other than the host material 121 andthe guest material 122.

The light-emitting layer 120 may have the structure of thelight-emitting layer described in Embodiment 1. In that case, the hostmaterial and the light-emitting material (fluorescent compound)described in Embodiment 1 are preferably used.

<<Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layer 140>>

In the light-emitting layer 140, the host material 141 is present in thelargest proportion by weight, and the guest material 142 (thephosphorescent compound) is dispersed in the host material 141. The T1levels of the host materials 141 (organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2) ofthe light-emitting layer 140 are preferably higher than the T1 level ofthe guest material 142 of the light-emitting layer 140.

Examples of the organic compound 141_1 include a zinc- or aluminum-basedmetal complex, an oxadiazole derivative, a triazole derivative, abenzimidazole derivative, a quinoxaline derivative, a dibenzoquinoxalinederivative, a dibenzothiophene derivative, a dibenzofuran derivative, apyrimidine derivative, a triazine derivative, a pyridine derivative, abipyridine derivative, a phenanthroline derivative, and the like. Otherexamples are an aromatic amine and a carbazole derivative. Specifically,the electron-transport material and the hole-transport materialdescribed in Embodiment 1 can be used.

As the organic compound 141_2, a substance which can form an exciplextogether with the organic compound 141_1 is preferably used.Specifically, the electron-transport material and the hole-transportmaterial described in Embodiment 1 can be used, for example. In thatcase, it is preferable that the organic compound 141_1, the organiccompound 141_2, and the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound) beselected such that the emission peak of the exciplex formed by theorganic compounds 141_1 and 141_2 overlaps with an absorption band,specifically an absorption band on the longest wavelength side, of atriplet metal to ligand charge transfer (MLCT) transition of the guestmaterial 142 (phosphorescent compound). This makes it possible toprovide a light-emitting element with drastically improved emissionefficiency. Note that in the case where a thermally activated delayedfluorescent compound is used instead of the phosphorescent compound, itis preferable that the absorption band on the longest wavelength side bea singlet absorption band.

As the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound), an iridium-,rhodium-, or platinum-based organometallic complex or metal complex canbe used; in particular, an organoiridium complex such as aniridium-based ortho-metalated complex is preferable. As anortho-metalated ligand, a 4H-triazole ligand, a 1H-triazole ligand, animidazole ligand, a pyridine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyrazineligand, an isoquinoline ligand, or the like can be given. As the metalcomplex, a platinum complex having a porphyrin ligand or the like can begiven. Specifically, the phosphorescent compound described in Embodiment1 as an example of the light-emitting material can be used, for example.

As the light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 140,any material can be used as long as the material can convert the tripletexcitation energy into light emission. As an example of the materialthat can convert triplet excitation energy into light emission, athermally activated delayed fluorescence compound can be given inaddition to the phosphorescent compound. Therefore, the “phosphorescentcompound” in the description can be replaced with the “thermallyactivated delayed fluorescence”.

The material that exhibits thermally activated delayed fluorescence maybe a material that can form a singlet excited state from a tripletexcited state by reverse intersystem crossing or may be a combination ofa plurality of materials which form an exciplex.

In the case where the thermally activated delayed fluorescent substanceis formed of one kind of material, any of the thermally activateddelayed fluorescent substances described in Embodiment 1 can bespecifically used.

In the case where the thermally activated delayed fluorescent substanceis used as the host material, it is preferable to use a combination oftwo kinds of compounds which form an exciplex. In this case, it isparticularly preferable to use the above-described combination of acompound which easily accepts electrons and a compound which easilyaccepts holes, which forms an exciplex.

There is no limitation on the emission colors of the light-emittingmaterials contained in the light-emitting layers 120 and 140, and theymay be the same or different. Light emitted from the light-emittingmaterials is mixed and extracted out of the element; therefore, forexample, in the case where their emission colors are complementarycolors, the light-emitting element can emit white light. Inconsideration of the reliability of the light-emitting element, theemission peak wavelength of the light-emitting material included in thelight-emitting layer 120 is preferably shorter than that of thelight-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 140.

Note that the light-emitting units 208 and 210 and the charge-generationlayer 115 can be formed by an evaporation method (including a vacuumevaporation method), an ink-jet method, a coating method, gravureprinting, or the like.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combinationwith any of the structures described in the other embodiments asappropriate.

Embodiment 3

In this embodiment, a display device of one embodiment of the presentinvention is described below with reference to FIGS. 17A and 17B, FIGS.18A and 18B, FIG. 19, FIGS. 20A to 20D, and FIG. 21.

Configuration Example 1 of Display Device

FIG. 17A is a top view illustrating a display device 600 and FIG. 17B isa cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line A-B and thedashed-dotted line C-D in FIG. 17A. The display device 600 includesdriver circuit portions (a signal line driver circuit portion 601 and ascan line driver circuit portion 603) and a pixel portion 602. Note thatthe signal line driver circuit portion 601, the scan line driver circuitportion 603, and the pixel portion 602 have a function of controllinglight emission from a light-emitting element.

The display device 600 also includes an element substrate 610, a sealingsubstrate 604, a sealant 605, a region 607 surrounded by the sealant605, a lead wiring 608, and an FPC 609.

Note that the lead wiring 608 is a wiring for transmitting signals to beinput to the signal line driver circuit portion 601 and the scan linedriver circuit portion 603 and for receiving a video signal, a clocksignal, a start signal, a reset signal, and the like from the FPC 609serving as an external input terminal. Although only the FPC 609 isillustrated here, the FPC 609 may be provided with a printed wiringboard (PWB).

As the signal line driver circuit portion 601, a CMOS circuit in whichan n-channel transistor 623 and a p-channel transistor 624 are combinedis formed. As the signal line driver circuit portion 601 or the scanline driver circuit portion 603, various types of circuits such as aCMOS circuit, a PMOS circuit, or an NMOS circuit can be used. Although adriver in which a driver circuit portion is formed and a pixel areformed over the same surface of a substrate in the display device ofthis embodiment, the driver circuit portion is not necessarily formedover the substrate and can be formed outside the substrate.

The pixel portion 602 includes a switching transistor 611, a currentcontrol transistor 612, and a lower electrode 613 electrically connectedto a drain of the current control transistor 612. Note that a partitionwall 614 is formed to cover end portions of the lower electrode 613. Asthe partition wall 614, for example, a positive type photosensitiveacrylic resin film can be used.

In order to obtain favorable coverage, the partition wall 614 is formedto have a curved surface with curvature at its upper or lower endportion. For example, in the case of using a positive photosensitiveacrylic as a material of the partition wall 614, it is preferable thatonly the upper end portion of the partition wall 614 have a curvedsurface with curvature (the radius of the curvature being 0.2 m to 3 m).As the partition wall 614, either a negative photosensitive resin or apositive photosensitive resin can be used.

Note that there is no particular limitation on a structure of each ofthe transistors (the transistors 611, 612, 623, and 624). For example, astaggered transistor can be used. In addition, there is no particularlimitation on the polarity of these transistors. For these transistors,n-channel and p-channel transistors may be used, or either n-channeltransistors or p-channel transistors may be used, for example.Furthermore, there is no particular limitation on the crystallinity of asemiconductor film used for the transistors. For example, an amorphoussemiconductor film or a crystalline semiconductor film may be used.Examples of a semiconductor material include Group 14 semiconductors(e.g., a semiconductor including silicon), compound semiconductors(including oxide semiconductors), organic semiconductors, and the like.For example, it is preferable to use an oxide semiconductor that has anenergy gap of 2 eV or more, preferably 2.5 eV or more and furtherpreferably 3 eV or more, for the transistors, so that the off-statecurrent of the transistors can be reduced. Examples of the oxidesemiconductor include an In—Ga oxide and an In-M-Zn oxide (M is aluminum(Al), gallium (Ga), yttrium (Y), zirconium (Zr), lanthanum (La), cerium(Ce), tin (Sn), hafnium (Hf), or neodymium (Nd)).

An EL layer 616 and an upper electrode 617 are formed over the lowerelectrode 613. For example, the lower electrode 613 functions as ananode and the upper electrode 617 functions as a cathode.

In addition, the EL layer 616 is formed by various methods such as anevaporation method with an evaporation mask (including a vacuumevaporation method), an ink-jet method, a coating method such as a spincoating method, or a gravure printing method. As another materialincluded in the EL layer 616, a low molecular compound or a highmolecular compound (including an oligomer or a dendrimer) may be used.

Note that a light-emitting element 618 is formed with the lowerelectrode 613, the EL layer 616, and the upper electrode 617. Thelight-emitting element 618 preferably has the structure described inEmbodiments 1 and 2. In the case where the pixel portion includes aplurality of light-emitting elements, the pixel portion may include boththe light-emitting element described in Embodiments 1 and 2 and alight-emitting element having a different structure.

When the sealing substrate 604 and the element substrate 610 areattached to each other with the sealant 605, the light-emitting element618 is provided in the region 607 surrounded by the element substrate610, the sealing substrate 604, and the sealant 605. The region 607 isfilled with a filler. In some cases, the region 607 is filled with aninert gas (nitrogen, argon, or the like) or filled with an ultravioletcurable resin or a thermosetting resin which can be used for the sealant605. For example, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC)-based resin, anacrylic-based resin, a polyimide-based resin, an epoxy-based resin, asilicone-based resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB)-based resin, or anethylene vinyl acetate (EVA)-based resin can be used. Alternatively, aninorganic material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, siliconnitride oxide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, or aluminum nitride canbe used. It is preferable that the sealing substrate be provided with arecessed portion and a drying agent be provided in the recessed portion,in which case deterioration due to influence of moisture can besuppressed. Note that the region 607 preferably has a stacked structureof a resin and an inorganic material so that the impurities such aswater can be effectively prevented from entering the light-emittingelement 618 which is inside the display device from the outside of thedisplay device 600. Furthermore, the sealant 605 or the sealingsubstrate 604 is not necessarily provided.

An optical element may be provided below the element substrate 610 tooverlap with the light-emitting element 618. The optical element mayhave a structure similar to that of the optical element described inEmbodiment 1.

An epoxy-based resin or glass frit is preferably used for the sealant605. It is preferable that such a material do not transmit moisture oroxygen as much as possible. As the sealing substrate 604, a glasssubstrate, a quartz substrate, or a plastic substrate formed of fiberreinforced plastic (FRP), poly(vinyl fluoride) (PVF), polyester,acrylic, or the like can be used.

<<Formation Method of Light-Emitting Element by Droplet DischargeMethod>>

Here, a method for forming the EL layer 616 by a droplet dischargemethod is described with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20D. FIGS. 20A to 20Dare cross-sectional views illustrating the method for forming the ELlayer 616.

First, the element substrate 610 over which the lower electrode 613 andthe partition wall 614 are formed is illustrated in FIG. 20A. However,as in FIG. 17B, the lower electrode 613 and the partition wall 614 maybe formed over an insulating film over a substrate.

Next, in a portion where the lower electrode 613 is exposed, which is anopening portion of the partition wall 614, a droplet 684 is dischargedfrom a droplet discharge apparatus 683 to form a layer 685 containing acomposition. The droplet 684 is a composition containing a solvent andis attached to the lower electrode 613 (see FIG. 20B).

Note that the method for discharging the droplet 684 may be performedunder reduced pressure.

Then, the solvent is removed from the layer 685 containing thecomposition, and the resulting layer is solidified to form the EL layer616 (see FIG. 20C).

The solvent may be removed by drying or heating.

Next, the upper electrode 617 is formed over the EL layer 616, and thelight-emitting element 618 is formed (see FIG. 20D).

When the EL layer 616 is formed by a droplet discharge method asdescribed above, the composition can be selectively discharged, andaccordingly, loss of materials can be reduced. Furthermore, alithography process or the like for shaping is not needed, and thus, theprocess can be simplified and cost reduction can be achieved.

Note that FIGS. 20A to 20D illustrate a process for forming the EL layer616 as a single layer. When the EL layer 616 includes functional layersin addition to the light-emitting layer, the layers are formedsequentially from the lower electrode 613 side. In that case, thehole-injection layer, the hole-transport layer, the light-emittinglayer, the electron-transport layer, and the electron-injection layermay be formed by a droplet discharging method. Alternatively, thehole-injection layer, the hole-transport layer, and the light-emittinglayer may be formed by a droplet discharging method, whereas theelectron-transport layer and the electron-injection layer may be formedby an evaporation method or the like. The light-emitting layer may beformed by a combination of a droplet discharging method and anevaporation method or the like.

The hole-injection layer can be formed usingpoly(ethylenedioxythiophene)/poly(styrenesulfonic acid) by a coatingmethod, such as a droplet discharging method or a spin coating method,for example. The hole-transport layer can be formed using ahole-transport material, e.g., polyvinylcarbazole, by a coating method,such as a droplet discharging method or a spin coating method, forexample. After the formation of the hole-injection layer and after theformation of the hole-transport layer, heat treatment may be performedunder an air atmosphere or an inert gas atmosphere such as nitrogen.

The light-emitting layer can be formed using a high molecular compoundor a low molecular compound that emits at least one of violet light,blue light, blue green light, green light, yellow green light, yellowlight, orange light, and red light. As the high molecular compound andthe low molecular compound, a fluorescent or phosphorescent organiccompound can be used. With use of a solvent in which the high molecularcompound and the low molecular compound are dissolved, thelight-emitting layer can be formed by a coating method, such as adroplet discharging method or a spin coating method. After the formationof the light-emitting layer, heat treatment may be performed under anair atmosphere or an inert gas atmosphere such as a nitrogen atmosphere.With use of the fluorescent or phosphorescent organic compound as aguest material, the guest material may be dispersed into a highmolecular compound or a low molecular compound that has higherexcitation energy than the guest material. The light-emitting organiccompound may be deposited alone or the light-emitting organic compoundmixed with another material may be deposited. The light-emitting layermay have a two-layered structure. In that case, each layer of thetwo-layer light-emitting layer preferably contains a light-emittingorganic compound whose emission color is different from that of theother layer. When the light-emitting layer is formed using a lowmolecular compound, an evaporation method can be used.

The electron-transport layer can be formed using a substance having ahigh electron-transport property. The electron-injection layer can beformed using a substance having a high electron-injection property. Notethat the electron-transport layer and the electron-injection layer canbe formed by an evaporation method.

The upper electrode 617 can be formed by an evaporation method or asputtering method. The upper electrode 617 can be formed using areflective conductive film. Alternatively, the upper electrode 617 mayhave a stacked layer including a reflective conductive film and alight-transmitting conductive film.

The droplet discharge method described above is a general term for ameans including a nozzle equipped with a composition discharge openingor a means to discharge droplets such as a head having one or aplurality of nozzles.

<<Droplet Discharge Apparatus>>

Next, a droplet discharge apparatus used for the droplet dischargemethod is described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a conceptualdiagram illustrating a droplet discharge apparatus 1400.

The droplet discharge apparatus 1400 includes a droplet discharge means1403. In addition, the droplet discharge means 1403 is equipped with ahead 1405 and a head 1412.

The heads 1405 and 1412 are connected to a control means 1407, and thiscontrol means 1407 is controlled by a computer 1410; thus, apreprogrammed pattern can be drawn.

The drawing may be conducted at a timing, for example, based on a marker1411 formed over a substrate 1402. Alternatively, the reference pointmay be determined on the basis of an outer edge of the substrate 1402.Here, the marker 1411 is detected by an imaging means 1404 and convertedinto a digital signal by an image processing means 1409. Then, thedigital signal is recognized by the computer 1410, and then, a controlsignal is generated and transmitted to the control means 1407.

An image sensor or the like using a charge coupled device (CCD) or acomplementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) can be used as theimaging means 1404. Note that information on a pattern to be formed overthe substrate 1402 is stored in a storage medium 1408, and the controlsignal is transmitted to the control means 1407 on the basis of theinformation, whereby the head 1405 and the head 1412 of the dropletdischarge means 1403 can be separately controlled. The heads 1405 and1412 are supplied with a material to be discharged from material supplysources 1413 and 1414 through pipes, respectively.

Inside the head 1405, a space 1406 filled with a liquid material asindicated by a dotted line and a nozzle serving as a discharge openingare provided. Although it is not shown, an inside structure of the head1412 is similar to that of the head 1405. When the nozzle sizes of theheads 1405 and 1412 are different from each other, different materialswith different widths can be discharged simultaneously. Each head candischarge and draw a plurality of light emitting materials. In the caseof drawing over a large area, the same material can be simultaneouslydischarged to be drawn from a plurality of nozzles in order to improvethroughput. When a large substrate is used, the heads 1405 and 1412 canfreely scan the substrate in directions indicated by arrows X, Y, and Zin FIG. 21, and a region in which a pattern is drawn can be freely set.Thus, a plurality of the same patterns can be drawn over one substrate.

Furthermore, a step of discharging the composition may be performedunder reduced pressure. Also, a substrate may be heated when thecomposition is discharged. After discharging the composition, eitherdrying or baking or the both is performed. Both the drying and bakingsteps are heat treatments but different in purpose, temperature, andtime period. The steps of drying and baking are performed under normalpressure or under reduced pressure by laser irradiation, rapid thermalannealing, heating using a heating furnace, or the like. Note that thetiming of the heat treatment and the number of times of the heattreatment are not particularly limited. The temperature for performingeach of the steps of drying and baking in a favorable manner depends onthe materials of the substrate and the properties of the composition.

As described above, the EL layer 616 can be formed with the dropletdischarge apparatus.

In the above-described manner, the display device including thelight-emitting device described in Embodiments 1 and 2 can be obtained.

Structural Example 2 of Display Device

Next, another example of the display device is described with referenceto FIGS. 18A and 18B and FIG. 19. Note that FIGS. 18A and 18B and FIG.19 are each a cross-sectional view of a display device of one embodimentof the present invention.

FIG. 18A illustrates a substrate 1001, a base insulating film 1002, agate insulating film 1003, gate electrodes 1006, 1007, and 1008, a firstinterlayer insulating film 1020, a second interlayer insulating film1021, a peripheral portion 1042, a pixel portion 1040, a driver circuitportion 1041, lower electrodes 1024W, 1024R, 1024G, and 1024B oflight-emitting elements, a partition wall 1025, an EL layer 1028, anupper electrode 1026 of the light-emitting elements, a sealing layer1029, a sealing substrate 1031, a sealant 1032, and the like areillustrated.

In FIG. 18A, examples of the optical elements, coloring layers (a redcoloring layer 1034R, a green coloring layer 1034G, and a blue coloringlayer 1034B) are provided on a transparent base material 1033.Furthermore, a light-blocking layer 1035 may be provided. Thetransparent base material 1033 provided with the coloring layers and thelight-blocking layer is positioned and fixed to the substrate 1001. Notethat the coloring layers and the light-blocking layer are covered withan overcoat layer 1036. In FIG. 18A, the coloring layer 1034R transmitsred light, the coloring layer 1034G transmits green light, and thecoloring layer 1034B transmits blue light.

FIG. 18B illustrates an example in which, as examples of the opticalelements, the coloring layers (the red coloring layer 1034R, the greencoloring layer 1034G, and the blue coloring layer 1034B) are providedbetween the gate insulating film 1003 and the first interlayerinsulating film 1020. As in this structure, the coloring layers may beprovided between the substrate 1001 and the sealing substrate 1031.

FIG. 19 illustrates an example in which, as examples of the opticalelements, the coloring layers (the red coloring layer 1034R, the greencoloring layer 1034G, and the blue coloring layer 1034B) are providedbetween the first interlayer insulating film 1020 and the secondinterlayer insulating film 1021. As in this structure, the coloringlayers may be provided between the substrate 1001 and the sealingsubstrate 1031.

The display device of one embodiment of the present invention includessubpixels for four colors (red, green, blue, and yellow or red, green,blue, and white). Since the light-emitting element which exhibits yellowor white light has high light emission efficiency, the display deviceincluding the subpixel for yellow or white can have lower powerconsumption.

The lower electrode 1024W preferably has a function of transmittinglight. The upper electrode 1026 is provided over the EL layer 1028. Inaddition, it is preferable that the upper electrode 1026 have a functionof reflecting light. It is preferable that the lower electrodes 1024R,1024G, and 1024B have functions of transmitting light and reflectinglight and that a microcavity structure be used between the upperelectrode 1026 and the lower electrodes 1024R, 1024G, and 1024B, inwhich case the intensity of light having a specific wavelength isincreased.

FIGS. 18A and 18B and FIG. 19 illustrate the structure provided with aplurality of light-emitting elements and the coloring layers for thelight-emitting elements as an example; however, the structure is notlimited thereto. For example, a structure in which any of the redcoloring layer 1034R, the green coloring layer 1034G, or the bluecoloring layer 1034B is not provided may be employed. The structurewhere the light-emitting elements are provided with the coloring layersis effective to suppress reflection of external light. In contrast, thestructure without the coloring layer is less likely to cause the loss oflight emitted from the light-emitting element and thus is effective toreduce power consumption.

The above-described display device has a structure in which light isextracted from the substrate 1001 side where the transistors are formed(a bottom-emission structure), but may have a structure in which lightis extracted from the sealing substrate 1031 side (a top-emissionstructure).

Note that the sealing substrate 1031 has a function of protecting thelight-emitting element. Thus, for the sealing substrate 1031, a flexiblesubstrate or a film can be used.

The structures described in this embodiment can be combined asappropriate with any of the other structures in this embodiment and theother embodiments.

Embodiment 4

In this embodiment, a display device including a light-emitting deviceof one embodiment of the present invention will be described withreference to FIGS. 22A and 22B, FIGS. 23A and 23B, and FIGS. 24A and24B.

FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the display device of one embodimentof the present invention, and FIG. 22B is a circuit diagram showing apixel circuit of the display device of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

<Display Device>

The display device shown in FIG. 22A includes a region including pixelsof display elements (the region is hereinafter referred to as a pixelportion 802), a circuit portion that is provided outside the pixelportion 802 and includes circuits for driving the pixels (the portion ishereinafter referred to as a driver circuit portion 804), circuitshaving a function of protecting elements (the circuits are hereinafterreferred to as protection circuits 806), and a terminal portion 807.Note that the protection circuits 806 are not necessarily provided.

A part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 804 is preferablyformed over a substrate over which the pixel portion 802 is formed.Thus, the number of components and the number of terminals can bereduced. When a part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 804 isnot formed over the substrate over which the pixel portion 802 isformed, the part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 804 can bemounted by COG or tape automated bonding (TAB).

The pixel portion 802 includes a plurality of circuits for drivingdisplay elements arranged in X rows (X is a natural number of 2 or more)and Y columns (Y is a natural number of 2 or more) (such circuits arehereinafter referred to as pixel circuits 801). The driver circuitportion 804 includes driver circuits such as a circuit for supplying asignal (scan signal) to select a pixel (the circuit is hereinafterreferred to as a scan line driver circuit 804 a) and a circuit forsupplying a signal (data signal) to drive a display element in a pixel(the circuit is hereinafter referred to as a signal line driver circuit804 b).

The scan line driver circuit 804 a includes a shift register or thelike. Through the terminal portion 807, the scan line driver circuit 804a receives a signal for driving the shift register and outputs a signal.For example, the scan line driver circuit 804 a receives a start pulsesignal, a clock signal, or the like and outputs a pulse signal. The scanline driver circuit 804 a has a function of controlling the potentialsof wirings supplied with scan signals (such wirings are hereinafterreferred to as scan lines GL_1 to GL_X). Note that a plurality of scanline driver circuits 804 a may be provided to control the scan linesGL_1 to GL_X separately. Alternatively, the scan line driver circuit 804a has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without beinglimited thereto, the scan line driver circuit 804 a can supply anothersignal.

The signal line driver circuit 804 b includes a shift register or thelike. The signal line driver circuit 804 b receives a signal (imagesignal) from which a data signal is derived, as well as a signal fordriving the shift register, through the terminal portion 807. The signalline driver circuit 804 b has a function of generating a data signal tobe written to the pixel circuit 801 which is based on the image signal.In addition, the signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function ofcontrolling output of a data signal in response to a pulse signalproduced by input of a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like.Furthermore, the signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function ofcontrolling the potentials of wirings supplied with data signals (suchwirings are hereinafter referred to as data lines DL_1 to DL_Y).Alternatively, the signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function ofsupplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, thesignal line driver circuit 804 b can supply another signal.

The signal line driver circuit 804 b includes a plurality of analogswitches or the like, for example. The signal line driver circuit 804 bcan output, as the data signals, signals obtained by time-dividing theimage signal by sequentially turning on the plurality of analogswitches. The signal line driver circuit 804 b may include a shiftregister or the like.

A pulse signal and a data signal are input to each of the plurality ofpixel circuits 801 through one of the plurality of scan lines GLsupplied with scan signals and one of the plurality of data lines DLsupplied with data signals, respectively. Writing and holding of thedata signal to and in each of the plurality of pixel circuits 801 arecontrolled by the scan line driver circuit 804 a. For example, to thepixel circuit 801 in the m-th row and the n-th column (m is a naturalnumber less than or equal to X, and n is a natural number less than orequal to Y), a pulse signal is input from the scan line driver circuit804 a through the scan line GL_m, and a data signal is input from thesignal line driver circuit 804 b through the data line DL_n inaccordance with the potential of the scan line GL_m.

The protection circuit 806 shown in FIG. 22A is connected to, forexample, the scan line GL between the scan line driver circuit 804 a andthe pixel circuit 801. Alternatively, the protection circuit 806 isconnected to the data line DL between the signal line driver circuit 804b and the pixel circuit 801. Alternatively, the protection circuit 806can be connected to a wiring between the scan line driver circuit 804 aand the terminal portion 807. Alternatively, the protection circuit 806can be connected to a wiring between the signal line driver circuit 804b and the terminal portion 807. Note that the terminal portion 807 meansa portion having terminals for inputting power, control signals, andimage signals to the display device from external circuits.

The protection circuit 806 is a circuit that electrically connects awiring connected to the protection circuit to another wiring when apotential out of a certain range is applied to the wiring connected tothe protection circuit.

As illustrated in FIG. 22A, the protection circuits 806 are connected tothe pixel portion 802 and the driver circuit portion 804, so that theresistance of the display device to overcurrent generated byelectrostatic discharge (ESD) or the like can be improved. Note that theconfiguration of the protection circuits 806 is not limited to that, andfor example, a configuration in which the protection circuits 806 areconnected to the scan line driver circuit 804 a or a configuration inwhich the protection circuits 806 are connected to the signal linedriver circuit 804 b may be employed. Alternatively, the protectioncircuits 806 may be configured to be connected to the terminal portion807.

FIG. 22A shows an example in which the driver circuit portion 804includes the scan line driver circuit 804 a and the signal line drivercircuit 804 b; however, the configuration is not limited thereto. Forexample, only the scan line driver circuit 804 a may be formed and aseparately prepared substrate where a signal line driver circuit isformed (e.g., a driver circuit substrate formed with a single crystalsemiconductor film or a polycrystalline semiconductor film) may bemounted.

Structural Example of Pixel Circuit

Each of the plurality of pixel circuits 801 in FIG. 22A can have aconfiguration shown in FIG. 22B, for example.

The pixel circuit 801 shown in FIG. 22B includes transistors 852 and854, a capacitor 862, and a light-emitting element 872.

One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 852 iselectrically connected to a wiring to which a data signal is supplied (adata line DL_n). A gate electrode of the transistor 852 is electricallyconnected to a wiring to which a gate signal is supplied (a scan lineGL_m).

The transistor 852 has a function of controlling whether to write a datasignal.

One of a pair of electrodes of the capacitor 862 is electricallyconnected to a wiring to which a potential is supplied (hereinafterreferred to as a potential supply line VL_a), and the other iselectrically connected to the other of the source electrode and thedrain electrode of the transistor 852.

The capacitor 862 functions as a storage capacitor for storing writtendata.

One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 854 iselectrically connected to the potential supply line VL_a. Furthermore, agate electrode of the transistor 854 is electrically connected to theother of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor852.

One of an anode and a cathode of the light-emitting element 872 iselectrically connected to a potential supply line VL_b, and the other iselectrically connected to the other of the source electrode and thedrain electrode of the transistor 854.

As the light-emitting element 872, any of the light-emitting elementsdescribed in Embodiments 1 and 2 can be used.

Note that a high power supply potential VDD is supplied to one of thepotential supply line VL_a and the potential supply line VL_b, and a lowpower supply potential VSS is supplied to the other.

In the display device including the pixel circuits 801 in FIG. 22B, thepixel circuits 801 are sequentially selected row by row by the scan linedriver circuit 804 a in FIG. 22A, for example, whereby the transistors852 are turned on and a data signal is written.

When the transistors 852 are turned off, the pixel circuits 801 in whichthe data has been written are brought into a holding state. Furthermore,the amount of current flowing between the source electrode and the drainelectrode of the transistor 854 is controlled in accordance with thepotential of the written data signal, whereby the light-emitting element872 emits light with luminance in accordance with the amount of flowingcurrent. This operation is sequentially performed row by row; thus, animage is displayed.

Alternatively, the pixel circuit can have a function of compensatingvariation in threshold voltages or the like of a transistor. FIGS. 23Aand 23B and FIGS. 24A and 24B show examples of the pixel circuit.

The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 23A includes six transistors(transistors 303_1 to 303_6), a capacitor 304, and a light-emittingelement 305. To the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 23A, wirings 301_1 to301_5 and wirings 302_1 and 302_2 are electrically connected. Note thatas the transistors 303_1 to 303_6, for example, p-channel transistorscan be used.

The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 23B has a configuration in which atransistor 303_7 is added to the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 23A. To thepixel circuit shown in FIG. 23B, wirings 301_6 and 301_7 areelectrically connected. The wirings 301_5 and 301_6 may be electricallyconnected to each other. Note that as the transistor 3037, for example,a p-channel transistor can be used.

The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 24A includes six transistors(transistors 308_1 to 308_6), the capacitor 304, and the light-emittingelement 305. To the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 24A, wirings 306_1 to306_3 and wirings 307_1 to 307_3 are electrically connected. The wirings306_1 and 306_3 may be electrically connected to each other. Note thatas the transistors 308_1 to 3086, for example, p-channel transistors canbe used.

The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 24B includes two transistors(transistors 309_1 and 309_2), two capacitors (capacitors 304_1 and304_2), and the light-emitting element 305. To the pixel circuitillustrated in FIG. 24B, wirings 311_1 to 311_3 and wirings 312_1 and312_2 are electrically connected. With the configuration of the pixelcircuit shown in FIG. 24B, the pixel circuit can be driven by a voltageinputting current driving method (also referred to as a CVCC method).Note that as the transistors 309_1 and 309_2, for example, p-channeltransistors can be used.

A light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention canbe used for an active matrix method in which an active element isincluded in a pixel of a display device or a passive matrix method inwhich an active element is not included in a pixel of a display device.

In an active matrix method, as an active element (a non-linear element),not only a transistor but also various active elements (non-linearelements) can be used. For example, an MIM (metal insulator metal), aTFD (thin film diode), or the like can also be used. Since such anelement has few numbers of manufacturing steps, manufacturing cost canbe reduced or yield can be improved. Alternatively, since the size ofthe element is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that powerconsumption can be reduced or higher luminance can be achieved.

As a method other than the active matrix method, the passive matrixmethod in which an active element (a non-linear element) is not used canalso be used. Since an active element (a non-linear element) is notused, the number of manufacturing steps is small, so that manufacturingcost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Alternatively, since anactive element (a non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratiocan be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or higherluminance can be achieved, for example.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in appropriatecombination with the structure described in any of the otherembodiments.

Embodiment 5

In this embodiment, a display device including a light-emitting deviceof one embodiment of the present invention and an electronic device inwhich the display device is provided with an input device will bedescribed with reference to FIGS. 25A and 25B, FIGS. 26A to 26C, FIG.27, FIGS. 28A and 28B, and FIG. 29.

<Description 1 of Touch Panel>

In this embodiment, a touch panel 2000 including a display device and aninput device will be described as an example of an electronic device. Inaddition, an example in which a touch sensor is included as an inputdevice will be described.

FIGS. 25A and 25B are perspective views of the touch panel 2000. Notethat FIGS. 25A and 25B illustrate only main components of the touchpanel 2000 for simplicity.

The touch panel 2000 includes a display device 2501 and a touch sensor2595 (see FIG. 25B). Furthermore, the touch panel 2000 includes asubstrate 2510, a substrate 2570, and a substrate 2590. Note that thesubstrate 2510, the substrate 2570, and the substrate 2590 each haveflexibility. Note that one or all of the substrates 2510, 2570, and 2590may be inflexible.

The display device 2501 includes a plurality of pixels over thesubstrate 2510 and a plurality of wirings 2511 through which signals aresupplied to the pixels. The plurality of wirings 2511 are led to aperipheral portion of the substrate 2510, and part of the plurality ofwirings 2511 forms a terminal 2519. The terminal 2519 is electricallyconnected to an FPC 2509(1). The plurality of wirings 2511 can supplysignals from a signal line driver circuit 2503 s(1) to the plurality ofpixels.

The substrate 2590 includes the touch sensor 2595 and a plurality ofwirings 2598 electrically connected to the touch sensor 2595. Theplurality of wirings 2598 are led to a peripheral portion of thesubstrate 2590, and parts of the plurality of wirings 2598 form aterminal. The terminal is electrically connected to an FPC 2509(2). Notethat in FIG. 25B, electrodes, wirings, and the like of the touch sensor2595 provided on the back side of the substrate 2590 (the side facingthe substrate 2510) are indicated by solid lines for clarity.

As the touch sensor 2595, a capacitive touch sensor can be used, forexample. Examples of the capacitive touch sensor are a surfacecapacitive touch sensor and a projected capacitive touch sensor.

Examples of the projected capacitive touch sensor are a self capacitivetouch sensor and a mutual capacitive touch sensor, which differ mainlyin the driving method. The use of a mutual capacitive touch sensor ispreferable because multiple points can be sensed simultaneously.

Note that the touch sensor 2595 illustrated in FIG. 25B is an example ofusing a projected capacitive touch sensor.

Note that a variety of sensors that can sense proximity or touch of asensing target such as a finger can be used as the touch sensor 2595.

The projected capacitive touch sensor 2595 includes electrodes 2591 andelectrodes 2592. The electrodes 2591 are electrically connected to anyof the plurality of wirings 2598, and the electrodes 2592 areelectrically connected to any of the other wirings 2598.

The electrodes 2592 each have a shape of a plurality of quadranglesarranged in one direction with one corner of a quadrangle connected toone corner of another quadrangle as illustrated in FIGS. 25A and 25B.

The electrodes 2591 each have a quadrangular shape and are arranged in adirection intersecting with the direction in which the electrodes 2592extend.

A wiring 2594 electrically connects two electrodes 2591 between whichthe electrode 2592 is positioned. The intersecting area of the electrode2592 and the wiring 2594 is preferably as small as possible. Such astructure allows a reduction in the area of a region where theelectrodes are not provided, reducing unevenness in transmittance. As aresult, unevenness in the luminance of light from the touch sensor 2595can be reduced.

Note that the shapes of the electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 arenot limited to the above-mentioned shapes and can be any of a variety ofshapes. For example, a structure may be employed in which the pluralityof electrodes 2591 are arranged so that gaps between the electrodes 2591are reduced as much as possible, and the electrodes 2592 are spacedapart from the electrodes 2591 with an insulating layer interposedtherebetween to have regions not overlapping with the electrodes 2591.In that case, between two adjacent electrodes 2592, a dummy electrodewhich is electrically insulated from these electrodes is preferablyprovided, whereby the area of a region having a different transmittancecan be reduced.

<Display Device>

Next, the display device 2501 is described in detail with reference toFIG. 26A. FIG. 26A corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along thedashed-dotted line X1-X2 in FIG. 25B.

The display device 2501 includes a plurality of pixels arranged in amatrix. Each of the pixels includes a display element and a pixelcircuit for driving the display element.

In the following description, an example of using a light-emittingelement that emits white light as a display element will be described;however, the display element is not limited to such an element. Forexample, light-emitting elements that emit light of different colors maybe included so that the light of different colors can be emitted fromadjacent pixels.

For the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2570, for example, a flexiblematerial with a vapor permeability of lower than or equal to 1×10⁻⁵g·m⁻²·day⁻¹, preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁻⁶ g·m⁻²·day⁻¹ can befavorably used. Note that materials whose thermal expansion coefficientsare substantially equal to each other are preferably used for thesubstrate 2510 and the substrate 2570 respectively. For example, thecoefficient of linear expansion of the materials are preferably lowerthan or equal to 1×10⁻³/K, further preferably lower than or equal to5×10⁻⁵/K, and still further preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁻⁵/K.

Note that the substrate 2510 is a stacked body including an insulatinglayer 2510 a for preventing impurity diffusion into the light-emittingelement, a flexible substrate 2510 b, and an adhesive layer 2510 c forattaching the insulating layer 2510 a and the flexible substrate 2510 bto each other. The substrate 2570 is a stacked body including aninsulating layer 2570 a for preventing impurity diffusion into thelight-emitting element, a flexible substrate 2570 b, and an adhesivelayer 2570 c for attaching the insulating layer 2570 a and the flexiblesubstrate 2570 b to each other.

For the adhesive layer 2510 c and the adhesive layer 2570 c, forexample, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (e.g., nylon, aramid),polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin, polyurethane, or an epoxyresin can be used. Alternatively, a material that includes a resinhaving a siloxane bond such as silicone can be used.

A sealing layer 2560 is provided between the substrate 2510 and thesubstrate 2570. The sealing layer 2560 preferably has a refractive indexhigher than that of air. In the case where light is extracted to thesealing layer 2560 side, the sealing layer 2560 can also serve as anoptical adhesive layer.

A sealant may be formed in the peripheral portion of the sealing layer2560. With use of the sealant, a light-emitting element 2550R can beprovided in a region surrounded by the substrate 2510, the substrate2570, the sealing layer 2560, and the sealant. Note that an inert gas(such as nitrogen or argon) may be used instead of the sealing layer2560. A drying agent may be provided in the inert gas so as to adsorbmoisture or the like. A resin such as an acrylic resin or an epoxy resinmay be used. For example, an epoxy-based resin or a glass frit ispreferably used as the sealant. As a material used for the sealant, amaterial which is impermeable to moisture or oxygen is preferably used.

The display device 2501 includes a pixel 2502R. The pixel 2502R includesa light-emitting module 2580R.

The pixel 2502R includes the light-emitting element 2550R and atransistor 2502 t that can supply electric power to the light-emittingelement 2550R. Note that the transistor 2502 t functions as part of thepixel circuit. The light-emitting module 2580R includes thelight-emitting element 2550R and a coloring layer 2567R.

The light-emitting element 2550R includes a lower electrode, an upperelectrode, and an EL layer between the lower electrode and the upperelectrode. As the light-emitting element 2550R, any of thelight-emitting elements described in Embodiments 1 and 2 can be used.

A microcavity structure may be employed between the lower electrode andthe upper electrode so as to increase the intensity of light having aspecific wavelength.

The coloring layer 2567R overlaps with the light-emitting element 2550R.Accordingly, part of light emitted from the light-emitting element 2550Rpasses through the coloring layer 2567R and is emitted to the outside ofthe light-emitting module 2580R as indicated by an arrow in FIG. 26A.

The display device 2501 includes a light-blocking layer 2567BM on thelight extraction side. The light-blocking layer 2567BM is provided so asto surround the coloring layer 2567R.

The coloring layer 2567R is a coloring layer having a function oftransmitting light in a particular wavelength range. For example, acolor filter for transmitting light in a red wavelength range, a colorfilter for transmitting light in a green wavelength range, a colorfilter for transmitting light in a blue wavelength range, a color filterfor transmitting light in a yellow wavelength range, or the like can beused. Each color filter can be formed with any of various materials by aprinting method, an inkjet method, an etching method using aphotolithography technique, or the like.

An insulating layer 2521 is provided in the display device 2501. Theinsulating layer 2521 covers the transistor 2502 t. With the insulatinglayer 2521, an unevenness surface caused by the pixel circuit isplanarized. The insulating layer 2521 may serve also as a layer forpreventing diffusion of impurities. This can prevent a reduction in thereliability of the transistor 2502 t or the like due to diffusion ofimpurities.

The light-emitting element 2550R is formed above the insulating layer2521. A partition 2528 is provided so as to cover end portions of thelower electrode in the light-emitting element 2550R. Note that a spacerfor controlling the distance between the substrate 2510 and thesubstrate 2570 may be provided over the partition 2528.

A scan line driver circuit 2503 g(1) includes a transistor 2503 t and acapacitor 2503 c. Note that the driver circuit can be formed in the sameprocess and over the same substrate as those of the pixel circuits.

Over the substrate 2510, the wirings 2511 through which a signal can besupplied are provided. Over the wirings 2511, the terminal 2519 isprovided. The FPC 2509(1) is electrically connected to the terminal2519. The FPC 2509(1) has a function of supplying a video signal, aclock signal, a start signal, a reset signal, or the like. Note that aprinted wiring board (PWB) may be attached to the FPC 2509(1).

In the display device 2501, transistors with any of a variety ofstructures can be used. FIG. 26A illustrates an example of usingbottom-gate transistors; however, the present invention is not limitedto this example, and top-gate transistors may be used in the displaydevice 2501 as illustrated in FIG. 26B.

In addition, there is no particular limitation on the polarity of thetransistor 2502 t and the transistor 2503 t. For these transistors,n-channel and p-channel transistors may be used, or either n-channeltransistors or p-channel transistors may be used, for example.Furthermore, there is no particular limitation on the crystallinity of asemiconductor film used for the transistors 2502 t and 2503 t. Forexample, an amorphous semiconductor film or a crystalline semiconductorfilm can be used. Examples of semiconductor materials include Group 14semiconductors (e.g., a semiconductor including silicon), compoundsemiconductors (including oxide semiconductors), organic semiconductors,and the like. An oxide semiconductor that has an energy gap of 2 eV ormore, preferably 2.5 eV or more, further preferably 3 eV or more ispreferably used for one of the transistors 2502 t and 2503 t or both, sothat the off-state current of the transistors can be reduced. Examplesof the oxide semiconductors include an In—Ga oxide, an In-M-Zn oxide (Mrepresents Al, Ga, Y, Zr, La, Ce, Sn, Hf, or Nd), and the like.

<Description of Touch Sensor>

Next, the touch sensor 2595 is described in detail with reference toFIG. 26C. FIG. 26C corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along thedashed-dotted line X3-X4 in FIG. 25B.

The touch sensor 2595 includes the electrodes 2591 and the electrodes2592 provided in a staggered arrangement on the substrate 2590, aninsulating layer 2593 covering the electrodes 2591 and the electrodes2592, and the wiring 2594 that electrically connects the adjacentelectrodes 2591 to each other.

The electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 are formed using alight-transmitting conductive material. As a light-transmittingconductive material, a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tinoxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, or zinc oxide to which gallium isadded can be used. Note that a film including graphene can be used aswell. The film including graphene can be formed, for example, byreducing a film containing graphene oxide. As a reducing method, amethod with application of heat or the like can be employed.

The electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 may be formed by, forexample, depositing a light-transmitting conductive material on thesubstrate 2590 by a sputtering method and then removing an unnecessaryportion by any of various pattern forming techniques such asphotolithography.

Examples of a material for the insulating layer 2593 are a resin such asan acrylic resin or an epoxy resin, a resin having a siloxane bond suchas silicone, and an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide,silicon oxynitride, or aluminum oxide.

Openings reaching the electrodes 2591 are formed in the insulating layer2593, and the wiring 2594 electrically connects the adjacent electrodes2591. A light-transmitting conductive material can be favorably used forthe wiring 2594 because the aperture ratio of the touch panel can beincreased. Moreover, a material having higher conductivity than theelectrodes 2591 and 2592 can be favorably used for the wiring 2594because electric resistance can be reduced.

One electrode 2592 extends in one direction, and a plurality ofelectrodes 2592 are provided in the form of stripes. The wiring 2594intersects with the electrode 2592.

Adjacent electrodes 2591 are provided with one electrode 2592 providedtherebetween. The wiring 2594 electrically connects the adjacentelectrodes 2591.

Note that the plurality of electrodes 2591 are not necessarily arrangedin the direction orthogonal to one electrode 2592 and may be arranged tointersect with one electrode 2592 at an angle of more than 0 degrees andless than 90 degrees.

One wiring 2598 is electrically connected to any of the electrodes 2591and 2592. Part of the wiring 2598 functions as a terminal. For thewiring 2598, a metal material such as aluminum, gold, platinum, silver,nickel, titanium, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper,or palladium or an alloy material containing any of these metalmaterials can be used.

Note that an insulating layer that covers the insulating layer 2593 andthe wiring 2594 may be provided to protect the touch sensor 2595.

A connection layer 2599 electrically connects the wiring 2598 to the FPC2509(2).

As the connection layer 2599, any of various anisotropic conductivefilms (ACF), anisotropic conductive pastes (ACP), or the like can beused.

<Description 2 of Touch Panel>

Next, the touch panel 2000 is described in detail with reference to FIG.27. FIG. 27 corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along thedashed-dotted line X5-X6 in FIG. 25A.

In the touch panel 2000 illustrated in FIG. 27, the display device 2501described with reference to FIG. 26A and the touch sensor 2595 describedwith reference to FIG. 26C are attached to each other.

The touch panel 2000 illustrated in FIG. 27 includes an adhesive layer2597 and an anti-reflective layer 2567 p in addition to the componentsdescribed with reference to FIGS. 26A and 26C.

The touch sensor 2595 is provided on the substrate 2510 side of thedisplay device 2501.

The adhesive layer 2597 is provided between the substrate 2510 and thesubstrate 2590 and attaches the touch sensor 2595 to the display device2501.

The adhesive layer 2597 preferably has a light-transmitting property. Aheat curable resin or an ultraviolet curable resin can be used for theadhesive layer 2597. For example, an acrylic resin, a urethane-basedresin, an epoxy-based resin, or a siloxane-based resin can be used.

The anti-reflective layer 2567 p is positioned in a region overlappingwith pixels. As the anti-reflective layer 2567 p, a circular polarizingplate can be used, for example.

The coloring layer 2567R is positioned in a region overlapping with thelight-emitting element 2550R. The light-emitting element 2550Rillustrated in FIG. 27 emits light to the side where the transistor 2502t is provided. Accordingly, part of light emitted from thelight-emitting element 2550R passes through the coloring layer 2567R andis emitted to the outside of the light-emitting module 2580R asindicated by an arrow in FIG. 27.

<Method for Driving Touch Panel>

Next, an example of a method for driving a touch panel is described withreference to FIGS. 28A and 28B.

FIG. 28A is a block diagram illustrating the structure of a mutualcapacitive touch sensor. FIG. 28A shows a pulse voltage output circuit2601 and a current sensing circuit 2602. Note that in FIG. 28A, sixwirings X1 to X6 represent the electrodes 2621 to which a pulse voltageis applied, and six wirings Y1 to Y6 represent the electrodes 2622 thatdetect changes in current. FIG. 28A also illustrates capacitors 2603that are each formed in a region where the electrodes 2621 and 2622overlap with each other. Note that functional replacement between theelectrodes 2621 and 2622 is possible.

The pulse voltage output circuit 2601 is a circuit for sequentiallyapplying a pulse voltage to the wirings X1 to X6. By application of apulse voltage to the wirings X1 to X6, an electric field is generatedbetween the electrodes 2621 and 2622 of the capacitor 2603. When theelectric field between the electrodes is shielded, for example, a changeoccurs in the capacitor 2603 (mutual capacitance). The approach orcontact of a sensing target can be sensed by utilizing this change.

The current sensing circuit 2602 is a circuit for detecting changes incurrent flowing through the wirings Y1 to Y6 that are caused by thechange in mutual capacitance in the capacitor 2603. No change in currentvalue is sensed in the wirings Y1 to Y6 when there is no approach orcontact of a sensing target, whereas a decrease in current value issensed when mutual capacitance is decreased owing to the approach orcontact of a sensing target. Note that an integrator circuit or the likeis used for sensing of current.

FIG. 28B is a timing chart showing input and output waveforms in themutual capacitive touch sensor shown in FIG. 28A. In FIG. 28B, sensingof a sensing target is performed in all the rows and columns in oneframe period. FIG. 28B shows a period when an object is not detected(not touched) and a period when an object is detected (touched). Sensedcurrent values of the wirings Y1 to Y6 are shown as the waveforms ofvoltage values.

A pulse voltage is sequentially applied to the wirings X1 to X6, and thewaveforms of the wirings Y1 to Y6 change in accordance with the pulsevoltage. When there is no approach or contact of a sensing target, thewaveforms of the wirings Y1 to Y6 change uniformly in accordance withchanges in the voltages of the wirings X1 to X6. The current value isdecreased at the point of approach or contact of a sensing target andaccordingly the waveform of the voltage value changes.

By sensing a change in mutual capacitance in this manner, the approachor contact of a sensing target can be sensed.

<Description of Sensor Circuit>

Although FIG. 28A shows a passive matrix type touch sensor in which onlythe capacitor 2603 is provided at the intersection of wirings as a touchsensor, an active matrix type touch sensor including a transistor and acapacitor may be used. FIG. 29 shows an example of a sensor circuitincluded in an active matrix type touch sensor.

The sensor circuit in FIG. 29 includes the capacitor 2603 andtransistors 2611, 2612, and 2613.

A signal G2 is input to a gate of the transistor 2613. A voltage VRES isapplied to one of a source and a drain of the transistor 2613, and oneelectrode of the capacitor 2603 and a gate of the transistor 2611 areelectrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of thetransistor 2613. One of a source and a drain of the transistor 2611 iselectrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the transistor2612, and a voltage VSS is applied to the other of the source and thedrain of the transistor 2611. The signal G1 is input to a gate of thetransistor 2612, and a wiring ML is electrically connected to the otherof the source and the drain of the transistor 2612. The voltage VSS isapplied to the other electrode of the capacitor 2603.

Next, the operation of the sensor circuit in FIG. 29 is described.First, a potential for turning on the transistor 2613 is supplied as thesignal G2, and a potential with respect to the voltage VRES is thusapplied to the node n connected to the gate of the transistor 2611.Then, a potential for turning off the transistor 2613 is applied as thesignal G2, whereby the potential of the node n is maintained.

Then, mutual capacitance of the capacitor 2603 changes owing to theapproach or contact of a sensing target such as a finger, andaccordingly the potential of the node n is changed from VRES.

In reading operation, a potential for turning on the transistor 2612 issupplied as the signal G1. A current flowing through the transistor2611, that is, a current flowing through the wiring ML is changed inaccordance with the potential of the node n. By sensing this current,the approach or contact of a sensing target can be sensed.

In each of the transistors 2611, 2612, and 2613, an oxide semiconductorlayer is preferably used as a semiconductor layer in which a channelregion is formed. In particular, such a transistor is preferably used asthe transistor 2613 so that the potential of the node n can be held fora long time and the frequency of operation of resupplying VRES to thenode n (refresh operation) can be reduced.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in appropriatecombination with the structure described in any of the otherembodiments.

Embodiment 6

In this embodiment, a display device including the light-emitting deviceof one embodiment of the present invention and a reflective liquidcrystal element, which can display images in both a transmissive modeand a reflective mode, will be described with reference to FIGS. 30A and30B, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIGS. 33A, 33B1, and 33B2.

FIG. 30A is a bottom view illustrating the structure of a display device300 of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 30B is a bottomview illustrating part of FIG. 30A. Note that in FIG. 30B, somecomponents are not illustrated in order to avoid complexity of thedrawing.

FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating the structure of thedisplay device 300 of one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31is a cross-sectional view taken along section lines X1-X2, X3-X4, X5-X6,X7-X8, X9-X10, and X11-X12 shown in FIG. 30A.

FIG. 32 illustrates a circuit of a pixel 302 included in the displaydevice 300 of one embodiment of the present invention.

Structural Example of Display Device

As illustrated in FIG. 30A, the display device 300 of one embodiment ofthe present invention includes a pixel portion 502, and a driver circuitGD and a driver circuit SD placed outside the pixel portion 502. Thepixel portion 502 includes the pixel 302.

The pixel 302 includes a liquid crystal element 350 and a light-emittingelement 550. In addition, the pixel 302 includes a transistor 581.Moreover, the pixel 302 includes a transistor 585 and a transistor 586(see FIG. 31).

The liquid crystal element 350 and the light-emitting element 550perform display in the same direction. For example, a dashed line arrowin FIG. 31 denotes the direction in which the liquid crystal element 350performs display by controlling the intensity of external lightreflection. A solid line arrow in FIG. 31 denotes the direction in whichthe light-emitting element 550 performs display.

The liquid crystal element 350 thus includes a reflective film 351Bhaving a function of reflecting incident light and a liquid crystallayer 353 containing a material having a function of adjusting theintensity of the reflected light. The liquid crystal element 350 has afunction of reflecting incident light and a function of adjusting theintensity of the reflected light.

A reflective liquid crystal element is preferably used as the liquidcrystal element 350. Specifically, the liquid crystal element 350preferably includes a liquid crystal layer 353, an electrode 351, and anelectrode 352. The electrode 351 preferably includes the reflective film351B having a function of reflecting light. In addition, the liquidcrystal layer 353 contains a liquid crystal material. Note that theelectrode 352 is provided so that an electric field for controlling thealignment of the liquid crystal material is generated between theelectrode 352 and the electrode 351. In addition, the liquid crystallayer 353 preferably has a function of adjusting the intensity of lightwhich enters the liquid crystal element 350 and is reflected by thereflective film 351B.

The electrode 351 is electrically connected to the transistor 581. It ispreferable that the electrode 351 have a structure in which a conductivefilm 351A and a conductive film 351C are provided so as to interpose thereflective film 351B therebetween. Interposing the reflective film 351Bbetween the conductive films 351A and 351C suppresses diffusion of anelement contained in the reflective film 351B into another layer.Moreover, it is possible to suppress contamination of the reflectivefilm 351B due to impurities entering from the outside.

It is preferable that the conductive films 351A and 351C each have afunction of transmitting light. Light incident on the liquid crystalelement 350 from the outside can be efficiently reflected by thereflective film 351B owing to the function of transmitting light of theconductive film 351A. Moreover, light emitted from the light-emittingelement 550 as will be shown later can be efficiently extracted to theoutside owing to the function of transmitting light of the conductivefilm 351C.

In addition, the display device 300 includes an alignment film 331 andan alignment film 332. The liquid crystal layer 353 is sandwichedbetween the alignment films 331 and 332.

The display device 300 includes a coloring layer 375, a light-blockinglayer 373, an insulating film 371, a functional film 370D, and afunctional film 370P in a region overlapping with the pixel 302.

The coloring layer 375 has a region overlapping with the liquid crystalelement 350. The light-blocking layer 373 has an opening in a regionoverlapping with the liquid crystal element 350. With the coloring layer375, light incident on the liquid crystal element 350 from the outsideenters the reflective film 351B through the coloring layer 375 and lightreflected by the reflective film 351B is extracted to the outsidethrough the coloring layer 375. Accordingly, light incident on theliquid crystal element 350 from the outside and reflected can beextracted to the outside with a predetermined color.

The insulating film 371 is provided between the coloring layer 375 andthe liquid crystal layer 353 or between the light-blocking layer 373 andthe liquid crystal layer 353. Owing to this, impurity diffusion from thelight-blocking layer 373, the coloring layer 375, or the like to theliquid crystal layer 353 can be suppressed. The insulating film 371 maybe provided to eliminate unevenness due to the thickness of the coloringlayer 375.

The functional films 370D and 370P each include a region overlappingwith the liquid crystal element 350. A substrate 370 is interposedbetween the functional film 370D and the liquid crystal element 350. Asthe functional films 370D and 370P, a film having a function ofdisplaying clearer images of the liquid crystal element 350 and thelight-emitting element 550, a film having a function of protecting thesurface of the display device 300, or the like can be used. Note thateither the functional film 370D or 370P may be used.

The display device 300 includes the substrate 370, a substrate 570, anda functional layer 520.

The substrate 370 has a region overlapping with the substrate 570. Thefunctional layer 520 is provided between the substrates 570 and 370.

The functional layer 520 includes the transistor included in the pixel302, the light-emitting element 550, an insulating film 521, and aninsulating film 528.

The insulating film 521 is provided between the transistor included inthe pixel 302 and the light-emitting element 550. The insulating film521 is preferably formed so that steps due to components overlappingwith the insulating film 521 can be covered to form a flat surface.

As the structure of the light-emitting element 550, any of thestructures of the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the presentinvention, which is shown in Embodiment 1 or 2, is preferably used.

The light-emitting element 550 includes an electrode 551, an electrode552, and a light-emitting layer 553. The electrode 552 has a regionoverlapping with the electrode 551. The light-emitting layer 553 isprovided between the electrodes 551 and 552. The electrode 551 iselectrically connected to the transistor 585 included in the pixel 302in a connection portion 522.

In the case where the light-emitting element 550 has a bottom-emissionstructure, the electrode 552 preferably has a function of reflectinglight. Therefore, it is preferable that the electrode 552 include areflective film having a function of reflecting light. The electrode 551preferably has a function of transmitting light.

In addition, the insulating film 528 has a region sandwiched between theelectrodes 551 and 552. The insulating film 528 has an insulatingproperty and thus can avoid a short circuit between the electrodes 551and 552. In order to avoid a short circuit, an end portion of theelectrode 551 preferably has a region in contact with the insulatingfilm 528. In addition, the insulating film 528 has an opening in aregion overlapping with the light-emitting element 550. In the opening,the light-emitting element 550 emits light.

The light-emitting layer 553 preferably contains an organic material oran inorganic material as a light-emitting material. Specifically, afluorescent organic light-emitting material or a phosphorescent organiclight-emitting material can be used. In addition, an inorganiclight-emitting material such as quantum dots can be used.

The reflective film 351B of the liquid crystal element 350 includes anopening 351H. The opening 351H has a region overlapping with theconductive films 351A and 351C each having a function of transmittinglight. The light-emitting element 550 has a function of emitting lighttoward the opening 351H. In other words, the liquid crystal element 350has a function of performing display in a region overlapping with thereflective film 351B, and the light-emitting element 550 has a functionof performing display in a region overlapping with the opening 351H.

In addition, the liquid crystal element has a function of performingdisplay in a region overlapping with the reflective film 351B, and thelight-emitting element has a function of performing display in a regionoverlapping with the opening 351H; therefore, the light-emitting element550 has a function of performing display in a region surrounded by thedisplay region of the liquid crystal element 350 (see FIG. 30B).

With the above-described structure in which a reflective liquid crystalelement and a light-emitting element are used as the liquid crystalelement 350 and the light-emitting element 550, respectively, thedisplay device can perform display using the reflective liquid crystalelement 350 in a bright environment, whereas using light from thelight-emitting element 550 in a dark environment. Thus, a convenientdisplay device with high visibility and low power consumption both inbright and dark environments can be provided. In addition, the displaydevice can perform display in a dim environment using both thereflective liquid crystal element (utilizing external light) and lightfrom the light-emitting element. Thus, a convenient display device withhigh visibility and low power consumption can be provided.

In the display device of one embodiment of the present invention, thecoloring layer 375, the functional film 370D, and the functional film370P each functioning as an optical element (e.g., a coloring layer, acolor conversion layer (e.g., quantum dot), a polarizing plate, and ananti-reflective film) are provided in a region overlapping with thelight-emitting element 550. Therefore, the color purity of light emittedfrom the light-emitting element 550 can be improved and thus the colorpurity of the display device 300 can be improved. Alternatively, thecontrast ratio of the display device 300 can be enhanced. For example, apolarizing plate, a retardation plate, a diffusing film, ananti-reflective film, a condensing film, or the like can be used as thefunctional films 370D and 370P. Alternatively, a polarizing platecontaining a dichromatic pigment can be used. Alternatively, anantistatic film preventing the attachment of a foreign substance, awater repellent film suppressing the attachment of stain, a hard coatfilm suppressing generation of a scratch in use, or the like can be usedas the functional films 370D and 370P.

Furthermore, the coloring layer 575 may be provided in a regionoverlapping the opening 351H sandwiched between the liquid crystalelement 350 and the light-emitting element 550. With such a structure,light emitted from the light-emitting element 550 is extracted to theoutside through the coloring layers 575 and 375; therefore, the colorpurity of the light emitted from the light-emitting element 550 can beimproved and the intensity of light emitted from the light-emittingelement 550 can be increased.

A material that transmits light of a predetermined color can be used forthe coloring layers 375 and 575. Thus, the coloring layers 375 and 575can be used as, for example, a color filter. For example, the coloringlayers 375 and 575 can be formed using a material transmitting light ofblue, green, red, yellow, or white.

A touch panel may be provided in the display device 300 illustrated inFIG. 31. As the touch panel, a capacitive touch panel (a surfacecapacitive touch panel or a projected capacitive touch panel) can bepreferably used.

Arrangement Example of Pixel and Wiring

The driver circuit GD is electrically connected to scan lines GL1 andGL2. The driver circuit GD includes a transistor 586, for example.Specifically, a transistor including a semiconductor film which can beformed through the same process as the transistor included in the pixel302 (e.g., the transistor 581) can be used as the transistor 586 (seeFIG. 31).

The driver circuit SD is electrically connected to signal lines SL1 andSL2. The driver circuit SD is electrically connected to a terminal whichcan be formed in the same process as the terminal 519B or 519C with aconductive material, for example.

The pixel 302 is electrically connected to a signal line SL1 (see FIG.32). Note that it is preferable that one of a source electrode and adrain electrode of the transistor 581 be electrically connected to thesignal line SL1 (see FIGS. 31 and 32).

FIG. 33A is a block diagram illustrating arrangement of pixel circuits,wirings, and the like which can be used for the display device 300 ofone embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 33B1 and 33B2 areschematic views illustrating arrangement of the openings 351H which canbe included in the display device 300 of one embodiment of the presentinvention.

The display device 300 of one embodiment of the present inventionincludes a plurality of pixels 302. Each pixel 302 includes the liquidcrystal element 350, the light-emitting element 550, the transistor 581,the transistor 585, and the like. The pixels 302 are provided in a rowdirection (a direction indicated by an arrow R in FIG. 33A) and in acolumn direction ((a direction indicated by an arrow C in FIG. 33A) thatintersects the row direction.

The group of pixels 302 arranged in the row direction are electricallyconnected to the scan line GL1. The group of pixels 302 arranged in thecolumn direction are electrically connected to the signal line SL1.

For example, the pixel adjacent to the pixel 302 in the row direction(the direction indicated by the arrow R in FIG. 33B1) includes anopening that does not align with the opening 351H in the pixel 302. Inaddition, for example, the pixel adjacent to the pixel 302 in the columndirection (the direction indicated by an arrow C in FIG. 33B2) includesan opening that does not align with the opening 351H in the pixel 302.

The opening 351H can have a polygonal shape (e.g., a quadrangular shapeor a cross-like shape), an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or thelike. The opening 351H may have a stripe shape, a slit-like shape, or acheckered pattern. The opening 351H may be moved to the side of anadjacent pixel. Preferably, the opening 351H is provided to the side ofanother pixel for emitting light of the same color. With this structure,a phenomenon in which light emitted from the light-emitting element 550enters a coloring film of the adjacent pixel (i.e., cross talk), can besuppressed.

As described above, the display device 300 of one embodiment of thepresent invention includes the pixel 302; the pixel 302 includes theliquid crystal element 350 and the light-emitting element 550; theelectrode 351 included in the liquid crystal element 350 is electricallyconnected to the transistor 581 included in the pixel 302; the electrode551 included in the light-emitting element 550 is electrically connectedto the transistor 585 included in the pixel 302; the light-emittingelement 550 has a function of emitting light through the opening 351H;and the liquid crystal element 350 has a function of reflecting lightentering the display device 300.

Thus, the liquid crystal element 350 and the light-emitting element 550can be driven using transistors that can be formed through the sameprocess, for example.

<Components of Display Device>

The pixel 302 is electrically connected to the signal line SL1, a signalline SL2, the scan line GL1, a scan line GL2, a wiring CSCOM, and awiring ANO (see FIG. 32).

In the case where the voltage of a signal supplied to the signal lineSL2 is different from the voltage of a signal supplied to the signalline SL1 of an adjacent pixel, the signal line SL1 of the adjacent pixelis positioned apart from the signal line SL2. Specifically, the signalline SL2 is positioned adjacent to the signal line SL2.

The pixel 302 includes the transistor 581, a capacitor C1, a transistor582, the transistor 585, and a capacitor C2.

For example, a transistor including a gate electrode electricallyconnected to the scan line GL1 and a first electrode (one of a sourceelectrode and a drain electrode) electrically connected to the signalline SL1 can be used as the transistor 581.

The capacitor C1 includes a first electrode electrically connected to asecond electrode (the electrode corresponds to the other of the sourceelectrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 581) and a secondelectrode electrically connected to the wiring CSCOM.

For example, a transistor including a gate electrode electricallyconnected to the scan line GL2 and a first electrode (one of a sourceelectrode and a drain electrode) electrically connected to the signalline SL2 can be used as the transistor 582.

The transistor 585 includes a gate electrode electrically connected to asecond electrode (the electrode corresponds to the other of the sourceelectrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 582) and a firstelectrode (one of a source electrode and a drain electrode) electricallyconnected to the wiring ANO.

A transistor in which a semiconductor film is sandwiched between aconductive film and a gate electrode can be used as the transistor 585.For example, a conductive film electrically connected to the wiringcapable of supplying a potential equal to that supplied to the firstelectrode (the one of the source electrode and the drain electrode) ofthe transistor 585 can be used.

The capacitor C2 includes a first electrode electrically connected to asecond electrode of the transistor 582 (the electrode corresponds to theother of the source electrode and the drain electrode) and a secondelectrode electrically connected to the first electrode (the one of thesource electrode and the drain electrode) of the transistor 585.

Note that a first electrode of the liquid crystal element 350 iselectrically connected to the second electrode (the other of the sourceelectrode and the drain electrode) of the transistor 581, and a secondelectrode of the liquid crystal element 350 is electrically connected toa wiring VCOM1. This enables the liquid crystal element 350 to bedriven.

In addition, a first electrode of the light-emitting element 550 iselectrically connected to the second electrode (the other of the sourceelectrode and the drain electrode) of the transistor 585, and a secondelectrode of the light-emitting element 550 is electrically connected toand a wiring VCOM2. This enables the light-emitting element 550 to bedriven.

<<Components of Pixel>>

The pixel 302 includes an insulating film 501C and an intermediate film354. The pixel 302 includes the transistor 581. In addition, the pixel302 includes the transistor 585 and the transistor 586. Thesemiconductor film used for these transistors is preferably an oxidesemiconductor.

The display device 300 includes a terminal 519B, and the terminal 519Bincludes a conductive film 511B and the intermediate film 354. Inaddition, the display device 300 includes a terminal 519C and aconductor 337, and the terminal 519C includes a conductive film 511C andthe intermediate film 354 (see FIG. 31). For example, a material havinga function of allowing hydrogen passage and supplying hydrogen can beused for the intermediate film 354. A conductive material can be usedfor the intermediate film 354. A light-transmitting material can be usedfor the intermediate film 354.

The insulating film 501C has a region sandwiched between an insulatingfilm 501A and a conductive film 511B.

The conductive film 511B is electrically connected to the pixel 302. Forexample, when the electrode 351 or the first conductive film is used asthe reflective film 351B, a surface functioning as a contact with theterminal 519B is oriented in the same direction as a surface of theelectrode 351 facing light incident on the liquid crystal element 350.

A flexible printed board 377 can be electrically connected to theterminal 519B with the conductive material 339. Thus, power or signalscan be supplied to the pixel 302 through the terminal 519B.

The conductive film 511C is electrically connected to the pixel 302. Forexample, when the electrode 351 or the first conductive film is used asthe reflective film 351B, a surface functioning as a contact with theterminal 519C is oriented in the same direction as a surface of theelectrode 351 facing light incident on the first liquid crystal element350.

The conductor 337 is sandwiched between the terminal 519C and theelectrode 352 to electrically connect them. A conductive particle can beused as the conductor 337, for example.

The display device 300 includes a bonding layer 505, a sealant 315 and astructure 335.

The bonding layer 505 is provided between the functional layer 520 andthe substrate 570 to bond them together. For the bonding layer 505, amaterial that can be used for the sealant 315 can be used, for example.

The sealant 315 is provided between the functional layer 520 and thesubstrate 570 to bond them together.

The structure 335 has a function of making a predetermined gap betweenthe functional layer 520 and the substrate 570.

An organic material, an inorganic material, or a composite material ofan organic material and an inorganic material can be used for thestructure 335. Accordingly, components between which the structure 335or the like is interposed can have a predetermined gap. Specifically,polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate,polysiloxane, an acrylic resin, or the like, or a composite material ofa plurality of kinds of resins selected from these can be used.Alternatively, a photosensitive material may be used.

<<Components of Liquid Crystal Element>>

Next, a structure example of the liquid crystal element that forms thedisplay device of one embodiment of the present invention is described.

The liquid crystal element 350 has a function of controllingtransmission or reflection of light. For example, a combined structureof a polarizing plate and a liquid crystal element or a MEMS shutterdisplay element can be used. The use of a reflective display element canreduce power consumption of a display device. Specifically, a reflectiveliquid crystal display element is preferably used as the liquid crystalelement 350.

Specifically, a liquid crystal element driven in any of the followingdriving modes can be used: an in-plane switching (IPS) mode, a twistednematic (TN) mode, a fringe field switching (FFS) mode, an axiallysymmetric aligned micro-cell (ASM) mode, an optically compensatedbirefringence (OCB) mode, a ferroelectric liquid crystal (FLC) mode, anantiferroelectric liquid crystal (AFLC) mode, and the like.

In addition, a liquid crystal element that can be driven by, forexample, a vertical alignment (VA) mode such as a multi-domain verticalalignment (MVA) mode, a patterned vertical alignment (PVA) mode, anelectrically controlled birefringence (ECB) mode, a continuous pinwheelalignment (CPA) mode, or an advanced super view (ASV) mode can be used.

Other examples of the driving method of the liquid crystal element 350include a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC) mode, a polymernetwork liquid crystal (PNLC) mode, and a guest-host mode. Note that oneembodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto, and variousliquid crystal elements and driving methods can be used.

A liquid crystal material or the like which can be used for a liquidcrystal element is used for the liquid crystal element 350. For example,thermotropic liquid crystal, low-molecular liquid crystal,high-molecular liquid crystal, polymer dispersed liquid crystal,ferroelectric liquid crystal, or anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal canbe used. Alternatively, a liquid crystal material which exhibits acholesteric phase, a smectic phase, a cubic phase, a chiral nematicphase, an isotropic phase, or the like can be used. Alternatively, aliquid crystal material which exhibits a blue phase can be used.

Alternatively, liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase for which analignment film is not involved may be used. A blue phase is one ofliquid crystal phases, which is generated just before a cholestericphase changes into an isotropic phase while temperature of cholestericliquid crystal is increased. Since the blue phase is generated only in anarrow temperature range, a liquid crystal composition in which 5 wt. %or more of a chiral material is mixed is used for the liquid crystallayer in order to improve the temperature range. The liquid crystalcomposition that includes the liquid crystal exhibiting a blue phase anda chiral material has a short response time of 1 msec or less, and hasoptical isotropy, which makes the alignment process unnecessary and theviewing angle dependence small. An alignment film does not need to beprovided and rubbing treatment is thus not necessary; accordingly,electrostatic discharge damage caused by the rubbing treatment can beprevented and defects and damage of the liquid crystal display device inthe manufacturing process can be reduced. Thus, productivity of theliquid crystal display device can be increased.

Moreover, it is possible to use a method called domain multiplication ormulti-domain design, in which a pixel is divided into some regions(subpixels) and molecules are aligned in different directions in theirrespective regions.

<<Components of Transistor>>

For example, a bottom-gate transistor, a top-gate transistor, or thelike can be used as the transistor 581, the transistor 582, thetransistor 585, the transistor 586, or the like.

For example, a semiconductor containing an element belonging to Group 14can be used for a semiconductor film of the transistor. Specifically, asemiconductor containing silicon can be used for the semiconductor filmof the transistor. For example, single crystal silicon, polysilicon,microcrystalline silicon, or amorphous silicon can be used for thesemiconductor film of the transistor.

For example, a transistor whose semiconductor film includes an oxidesemiconductor can be used for the transistor 581, the transistor 582,the transistor 585, the transistor 586, or the like. Specifically, anoxide semiconductor containing indium or an oxide semiconductorcontaining indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for a semiconductorfilm.

When the transistor 581, the transistor 582, the transistor 585, thetransistor 586, or the like includes an oxide semiconductor, a pixelcircuit can hold an image signal for a longer time than a pixel circuitincluding a transistor in which amorphous silicon is used for asemiconductor film. Specifically, the selection signal can be suppliedat a frequency lower than 30 Hz, preferably lower than 1 Hz, furtherpreferably less than once per minute while flickering is suppressed.Consequently, eyestrain on a user of the information processing devicecan be reduced, and power consumption for driving can be reduced.

The structure and method described in this embodiment can be implementedby being combined as appropriate with structures and methods describedin the other embodiments.

Embodiment 7

In this embodiment, a display module and electronic devices including alight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention aredescribed with reference to FIG. 34, FIGS. 35A to 35G, FIGS. 36A to 36F,FIGS. 37A to 37D, and FIGS. 38A to 38D.

<Description of Display Module>

In a display module 8000 in FIG. 34, a touch sensor 8004 connected to anFPC 8003, a display device 8006 connected to an FPC 8005, a frame 8009,a printed board 8010, and a battery 8011 are provided between an uppercover 8001 and a lower cover 8002.

The light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention canbe used for the display device 8006, for example.

The shapes and sizes of the upper cover 8001 and the lower cover 8002can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the sizes of the touchsensor 8004 and the display device 8006.

The touch sensor 8004 can be a resistive touch sensor or a capacitivetouch sensor and may be formed to overlap with the display device 8006.A counter substrate (sealing substrate) of the display device 8006 canhave a touch sensor function. A photosensor may be provided in eachpixel of the display device 8006 so that an optical touch sensor isobtained.

The frame 8009 protects the display device 8006 and also serves as anelectromagnetic shield for blocking electromagnetic waves generated bythe operation of the printed board 8010. The frame 8009 can alsofunction as a radiator plate.

The printed board 8010 has a power supply circuit and a signalprocessing circuit for outputting a video signal and a clock signal. Asa power source for supplying power to the power supply circuit, anexternal commercial power source or the battery 8011 provided separatelymay be used. The battery 8011 can be omitted in the case of using acommercial power source.

The display module 8000 may be additionally provided with a member suchas a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet.

<Description of Electronic Device>

FIGS. 35A to 35G illustrate electronic devices. These electronic devicescan include a housing 9000, a display portion 9001, a speaker 9003,operation keys 9005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), aconnection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007 (a sensor having a function ofmeasuring or sensing force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration,angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light, liquid,magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness,electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate,humidity, gradient, oscillation, odor, or infrared ray), a microphone9008, and the like. In addition, the sensor 9007 may have a function ofmeasuring biological information like a pulse sensor and a finger printsensor.

The electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 35A to 35G can have avariety of functions, for example, a function of displaying a variety ofdata (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on thedisplay portion, a touch sensor function, a function of displaying acalendar, date, time, and the like, a function of controlling a processwith a variety of software (programs), a wireless communicationfunction, a function of being connected to a variety of computernetworks with a wireless communication function, a function oftransmitting and receiving a variety of data with a wirelesscommunication function, a function of reading a program or data storedin a memory medium and displaying the program or data on the displayportion, and the like. Note that functions of the electronic devices inFIGS. 35A to 35G are not limited thereto, and the electronic devices canhave a variety of functions. Although not illustrated in FIGS. 35A to35G, the electronic devices may each have a plurality of displayportions. The electronic devices may have a camera or the like and afunction of taking a still image, a function of taking a moving image, afunction of storing the taken image in a memory medium (an externalmemory medium or a memory medium incorporated in the camera), a functionof displaying the taken image on the display portion, or the like.

The electronic devices in FIGS. 35A to 35G will be described in detailbelow.

FIG. 35A is a perspective view of a portable information terminal 9100.The display portion 9001 of the portable information terminal 9100 isflexible. Therefore, the display portion 9001 can be incorporated alonga bent surface of a bent housing 9000. In addition, the display portion9001 includes a touch sensor, and operation can be performed by touchingthe screen with a finger, a stylus, or the like. For example, when anicon displayed on the display portion 9001 is touched, an applicationcan be started.

FIG. 35B is a perspective view of a portable information terminal 9101.The portable information terminal 9101 functions as, for example, one ormore of a telephone set, a notebook, and an information browsing system.Specifically, the portable information terminal can be used as asmartphone. Note that the speaker 9003, the connection terminal 9006,the sensor 9007, and the like, which are not illustrated, can bepositioned in the portable information terminal 9101 as in the portableinformation terminal 9100 illustrated in FIG. 35A. The portableinformation terminal 9101 can display characters and image informationon its plurality of surfaces. For example, three operation buttons 9050(also referred to as operation icons, or simply, icons) can be displayedon one surface of the display portion 9001. Furthermore, information9051 indicated by dashed rectangles can be displayed on another surfaceof the display portion 9001. Examples of the information 9051 includedisplay indicating reception of an incoming email, social networkingservice (SNS) message, call, and the like; the title and sender of anemail and SNS message; the date; the time; remaining battery; anddisplay indicating the strength of a received signal such as a radiowave. Instead of the information 9051, the operation buttons 9050 or thelike may be displayed on the position where the information 9051 isdisplayed.

As a material of the housing 9000, an alloy, plastic, or ceramic can beused, for example. As the plastic, reinforced plastic can be used. Acarbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), which is a kind of reinforcedplastic, has advantages of lightweight and corrosion-free. As otherexamples of the reinforced plastic, reinforced plastic using a glassfiber and reinforced plastic using an aramid fiber are given. The alloyincludes aluminum alloy and magnesium alloy. In particular, amorphousalloy (also referred to as metal glass) containing zirconium, copper,nickel, and titanium is superior in terms of high elastic strength. Thisamorphous alloy includes a glass transition region at room temperature,which is also referred to as a bulk-solidifying amorphous alloy andsubstantially has an amorphous atomic structure. By a solidificationcasting method, an alloy material is molded in a mold of at least partof the housing and coagulated so that the part of the housing is formedusing a bulk-solidifying amorphous alloy. The amorphous alloy mayinclude beryllium, silicon, niobium, boron, gallium, molybdenum,tungsten, manganese, iron, cobalt, yttrium, vanadium, phosphorus,carbon, or the like in addition to zirconium, copper, nickel, andtitanium. The amorphous alloy may be formed by a vacuum evaporationmethod, a sputtering method, an electroplating method, an electrolessplating method, or the like instead of the solidification castingmethod. The amorphous alloy may include a microcrystal or a nanocrystalas long as a state without a long-range order (a periodic structure) ismaintained as a whole. Note that the term alloy refer to both a completesolid solution alloy which has a single solid phase structure and apartial solution that has two or more phases. The housing 9000 using theamorphous alloy can have high elastic strength. Even if the portableinformation terminal 9101 is dropped and the impact causes temporarydeformation, the use of the amorphous alloy in the housing 9000 allows areturn to the original shape; thus, the impact resistance of theportable information terminal 9101 can be improved.

FIG. 35C is a perspective view of a portable information terminal 9102.The portable information terminal 9102 has a function of displayinginformation on three or more surfaces of the display portion 9001. Here,information 9052, information 9053, and information 9054 are displayedon different surfaces. For example, a user of the portable informationterminal 9102 can see the display (here, the information 9053) with theportable information terminal 9102 put in a breast pocket of his/herclothes. Specifically, a caller's phone number, name, or the like of anincoming call is displayed in a position that can be seen from above theportable information terminal 9102. Thus, the user can see the displaywithout taking out the portable information terminal 9102 from thepocket and decide whether to answer the call.

FIG. 35D is a perspective view of a watch-type portable informationterminal 9200. The portable information terminal 9200 is capable ofexecuting a variety of applications such as mobile phone calls,e-mailing, viewing and editing texts, music reproduction, Internetcommunication, and computer games. The display surface of the displayportion 9001 is bent, and images can be displayed on the bent displaysurface. The portable information terminal 9200 can employ near fieldcommunication that is a communication method based on an existingcommunication standard. In that case, for example, mutual communicationbetween the portable information terminal and a headset capable ofwireless communication can be performed, and thus hands-free calling ispossible. The portable information terminal 9200 includes the connectionterminal 9006, and data can be directly transmitted to and received fromanother information terminal via a connector. Power charging through theconnection terminal 9006 is possible. Note that the charging operationmay be performed by wireless power feeding without using the connectionterminal 9006.

FIGS. 35E, 35F, and 35G are perspective views of a foldable portableinformation terminal 9201 that is opened, that is shifted from theopened state to the folded state or from the folded state to the openedstate, and that is folded, respectively. The portable informationterminal 9201 is highly portable when folded. When the portableinformation terminal 9201 is opened, a seamless large display region ishighly browsable. The display portion 9001 of the portable informationterminal 9201 is supported by three housings 9000 joined together byhinges 9055. By folding the portable information terminal 9201 at aconnection portion between two housings 9000 with the hinges 9055, theportable information terminal 9201 can be reversibly changed in shapefrom an opened state to a folded state. For example, the portableinformation terminal 9201 can be bent with a radius of curvature greaterthan or equal to 1 mm and less than or equal to 150 mm.

Examples of electronic devices are a television set (also referred to asa television or a television receiver), a monitor of a computer or thelike, a camera such as a digital camera or a digital video camera, adigital photo frame, a mobile phone handset (also referred to as amobile phone or a mobile phone device), a goggle-type display (headmounted display), a portable game machine, a portable informationterminal, an audio reproducing device, and a large-sized game machinesuch as a pachinko machine.

Furthermore, the electronic device of one embodiment of the presentinvention may include a secondary battery. It is preferable that thesecondary battery be capable of being charged by non-contact powertransmission.

Examples of the secondary battery include a lithium ion secondarybattery such as a lithium polymer battery using a gel electrolyte(lithium ion polymer battery), a lithium-ion battery, a nickel-hydridebattery, a nickel-cadmium battery, an organic radical battery, alead-acid battery, an air secondary battery, a nickel-zinc battery, anda silver-zinc battery.

The electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention mayinclude an antenna. When a signal is received by the antenna, theelectronic device can display an image, data, or the like on a displayportion. When the electronic device includes a secondary battery, theantenna may be used for non-contact power transmission.

FIG. 36A illustrates a portable game machine including a housing 7101, ahousing 7102, a display portion 7103, a display portion 7104, amicrophone 7105, speakers 7106, an operation key 7107, a stylus 7108,and the like. When the display device according to one embodiment of thepresent invention is used as the display portion 7103 or 7104, it ispossible to provide a user-friendly portable game machine with qualitythat hardly deteriorates. Although the portable game machine illustratedin FIG. 36A includes two display portions, the display portion 7103 andthe display portion 7104, the number of display portions included in theportable game machine is not limited to two.

FIG. 36B illustrates a video camera including a housing 7701, a housing7702, a display portion 7703, operation keys 7704, a lens 7705, a joint7706, and the like. The operation keys 7704 and the lens 7705 areprovided for the housing 7701, and the display portion 7703 is providedfor the housing 7702. The housing 7701 and the housing 7702 areconnected to each other with the joint 7706, and the angle between thehousing 7701 and the housing 7702 can be changed with the joint 7706.Images displayed on the display portion 7703 may be switched inaccordance with the angle at the joint 7706 between the housing 7701 andthe housing 7702.

FIG. 36C illustrates a notebook personal computer including a housing7121, a display portion 7122, a keyboard 7123, a pointing device 7124,and the like. Note that the display portion 7122 is small- ormedium-sized but can perform 8 k display because it has greatly highpixel density and high resolution; therefore, a significantly clearimage can be obtained.

FIG. 36D is an external view of a head-mounted display 7200.

The head-mounted display 7200 includes a mounting portion 7201, a lens7202, a main body 7203, a display portion 7204, a cable 7205, and thelike. The mounting portion 7201 includes a battery 7206.

Power is supplied from the battery 7206 to the main body 7203 throughthe cable 7205. The main body 7203 includes a wireless receiver or thelike to receive video data, such as image data, and display it on thedisplay portion 7204. The movement of the eyeball and the eyelid of auser is captured by a camera in the main body 7203 and then coordinatesof the points the user looks at are calculated using the captured datato utilize the eye point of the user as an input means.

The mounting portion 7201 may include a plurality of electrodes so as tobe in contact with the user. The main body 7203 may be configured tosense current flowing through the electrodes with the movement of theuser's eyeball to recognize the direction of his or her eyes. The mainbody 7203 may be configured to sense current flowing through theelectrodes to monitor the user's pulse. The mounting portion 7201 mayinclude sensors, such as a temperature sensor, a pressure sensor, or anacceleration sensor, so that the user's biological information can bedisplayed on the display portion 7204. The main body 7203 may beconfigured to sense the movement of the user's head or the like to movean image displayed on the display portion 7204 in synchronization withthe movement of the user's head or the like.

FIG. 36E is an external view of a camera 7300. The camera 7300 includesa housing 7301, a display portion 7302, an operation button 7303, ashutter button 7304, a connection portion 7305, and the like. A lens7306 can be put on the camera 7300.

The connection portion 7305 includes an electrode to connect with afinder 7400, which is described below, a stroboscope, or the like.

Although the lens 7306 of the camera 7300 here is detachable from thehousing 7301 for replacement, the lens 7306 may be included in thehousing 7301.

Images can be taken at the touch of the shutter button 7304. Inaddition, images can be taken by operation of the display portion 7302including a touch sensor.

In the display portion 7302, the display device of one embodiment of thepresent invention or a touch sensor can be used.

FIG. 36F shows the camera 7300 with the finder 7400 connected.

The finder 7400 includes a housing 7401, a display portion 7402, and abutton 7403.

The housing 7401 includes a connection portion for engagement with theconnection portion 7305 of the camera 7300 so that the finder 7400 canbe connected to the camera 7300. The connection portion includes anelectrode, and an image or the like received from the camera 7300through the electrode can be displayed on the display portion 7402.

The button 7403 functions as a power supply button. With the button7403, on/off of display on the display portion 7402 can be switched.

Although the camera 7300 and the finder 7400 are separate and detachableelectronic devices in FIGS. 36E and 30F, the housing 7301 of the camera7300 may include a finder having a display device of one embodiment ofthe present invention or a touch sensor.

FIGS. 37A to 37E illustrate outward appearances of head-mounted display7500 and 7510.

The head-mounted display 7500 includes a housing 7501, two displayportions 7502, an operation button 7503, and an object for fixing, suchas a band, 7504.

The head-mounted display 7500 has the functions of the above-describedhead-mounted display 7200 and further includes two display portions.

With the two display portions 7502, the user can see one display portionwith one eye and the other display portion with the other eye. Thus, ahigh-resolution image can be displayed even when a three-dimensionaldisplay using parallax or the like is performed. The display portion7502 is curved around an arc with the user's eye as an approximatecenter. Thus, distances between the user's eye and display surfaces ofthe display portion become equal; thus, the user can see a more naturalimage. Even when the luminance or chromaticity of light from the displayportion is changed depending on the angle at which the user see it,since the user's eye is positioned in a normal direction of the displaysurface of the display portion, the influence of the change can besubstantially ignorable and thus a more realistic image can bedisplayed.

The operation button 7503 serves as a power button or the like. A buttonother than the operation button 7503 may be included.

The head-mounted display 7510 includes the housing 7501, the displayportion 7502, the object for fixing, such as a band, 7504, and a pair oflenses 7505.

A user can see display on the display portion 7502 through the lenses7505. It is favorable that the display portion 7502 be curved. When thedisplay portion 7502 is curved, a user can feel high realistic sensationof images.

The display device of one embodiment of the present invention can beused in the display portion 7502. The display device of one embodimentof the present invention can have a high resolution; thus, even when animage is magnified using the lenses 7505 as illustrated in FIG. 37E, theuser does not perceive pixels, and thus a more realistic image can bedisplayed.

FIG. 38A illustrates an example of a television set. In the televisionset 9300, the display portion 9001 is incorporated into the housing9000. Here, the housing 9000 is supported by a stand 9301.

The television set 9300 illustrated in FIG. 38A can be operated with anoperation switch of the housing 9000 or a separate remote controller9311. The display portion 9001 may include a touch sensor. Thetelevision set 9300 can be operated by touching the display portion 9001with a finger or the like. The remote controller 9311 may be providedwith a display portion for displaying data output from the remotecontroller 9311. With operation keys or a touch panel of the remotecontroller 9311, channels or volume can be controlled and imagesdisplayed on the display portion 9001 can be controlled.

The television set 9300 is provided with a receiver, a modem, or thelike. With use of the receiver, general television broadcasting can bereceived. Moreover, when the television device is connected to acommunication network with or without wires via the modem, one-way (froma sender to a receiver) or two-way (between a sender and a receiver orbetween receivers) information communication can be performed.

The electronic device or the lighting device of one embodiment of thepresent invention has flexibility and therefore can be incorporatedalong a curved inside/outside wall surface of a house or a building or acurved interior/exterior surface of a car.

FIG. 38B is an external view of an automobile 9700. FIG. 38C illustratesa driver's seat of the automobile 9700. The automobile 9700 includes acar body 9701, wheels 9702, a dashboard 9703, lights 9704, and the like.The display device, the light-emitting device, or the like of oneembodiment of the present invention can be used in a display portion orthe like of the automobile 9700. For example, the display device, thelight-emitting device, or the like of one embodiment of the presentinvention can be used in display portions 9710 to 9715 illustrated inFIG. 38C.

The display portion 9710 and the display portion 9711 are displaydevices provided in an automobile windshield. The display device, thelight-emitting device, or the like of one embodiment of the presentinvention can be a see-through display device, through which theopposite side can be seen, using a light-transmitting conductivematerial for its electrodes and wirings. Such a see-through displayportion 9710 or 9711 does not hinder driver's vision during driving theautomobile 9700. Thus, the display device, the light-emitting device, orthe like of one embodiment of the present invention can be provided inthe windshield of the automobile 9700. Note that in the case where atransistor or the like for driving the display device, thelight-emitting device, or the like is provided, a transistor having alight-transmitting property, such as an organic transistor using anorganic semiconductor material or a transistor using an oxidesemiconductor, is preferably used.

The display portion 9712 is a display device provided on a pillarportion. For example, the display portion 9712 can compensate for theview hindered by the pillar portion by showing an image taken by animaging unit provided on the car body. The display portion 9713 is adisplay device provided on the dashboard. For example, the displayportion 9713 can compensate for the view hindered by the dashboardportion by showing an image taken by an imaging unit provided on the carbody. That is, showing an image taken by an imaging unit provided on theoutside of the car body leads to elimination of blind areas andenhancement of safety. In addition, showing an image so as to compensatefor the area which a driver cannot see makes it possible for the driverto confirm safety easily and comfortably.

FIG. 38D illustrates the inside of a car in which bench seats are usedfor a driver seat and a front passenger seat. A display portion 9721 isa display device provided in a door portion. For example, the displayportion 9721 can compensate for the view hindered by the door portion byshowing an image taken by an imaging unit provided on the car body. Adisplay portion 9722 is a display device provided in a steering wheel. Adisplay portion 9723 is a display device provided in the middle of aseating face of the bench seat. Note that the display device can be usedas a seat heater by providing the display device on the seating face orbackrest and by using heat generation of the display device as a heatsource.

The display portion 9714, the display portion 9715, and the displayportion 9722 can display a variety of kinds of information such asnavigation data, a speedometer, a tachometer, a mileage, a fuel meter, agearshift indicator, and air-condition setting. The content, layout, orthe like of the display on the display portions can be changed freely bya user as appropriate. The information listed above can also bedisplayed on the display portions 9710 to 9713, 9721, and 9723. Thedisplay portions 9710 to 9715 and 9721 to 9723 can also be used aslighting devices. The display portions 9710 to 9715 and 9721 to 9723 canalso be used as heating devices.

A display device 9500 illustrated in FIGS. 39A and 39B includes aplurality of display panels 9501, a hinge 9511, and a bearing 9512. Theplurality of display panels 9501 each include a display region 9502 anda light-transmitting region 9503.

Each of the plurality of display panels 9501 is flexible. Two adjacentdisplay panels 9501 are provided so as to partly overlap with eachother. For example, the light-transmitting regions 9503 of the twoadjacent display panels 9501 can be overlapped each other. A displaydevice having a large screen can be obtained with the plurality ofdisplay panels 9501. The display device is highly versatile because thedisplay panels 9501 can be wound depending on its use.

Moreover, although the display regions 9502 of the adjacent displaypanels 9501 are separated from each other in FIGS. 39A and 39B, withoutlimitation to this structure, the display regions 9502 of the adjacentdisplay panels 9501 may overlap with each other without any space sothat a continuous display region 9502 is obtained, for example.

The electronic devices described in this embodiment each include thedisplay portion for displaying some sort of data. Note that thelight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention canalso be used for an electronic device which does not have a displayportion. The structure in which the display portion of the electronicdevice described in this embodiment is flexible and display can beperformed on the bent display surface or the structure in which thedisplay portion of the electronic device is foldable is described as anexample; however, the structure is not limited thereto and a structurein which the display portion of the electronic device is not flexibleand display is performed on a plane portion may be employed.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in appropriatecombination with the structure described in any of the otherembodiments.

Embodiment 8

In this embodiment, a light-emitting device of one embodiment of thepresent invention is described with reference to FIGS. 40A to 40C, FIGS.2A and 2B and FIGS. 41A to 41D.

FIG. 40A is a perspective view of a light-emitting device 3000 shown inthis embodiment, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view alongdashed-dotted line E-F in FIG. 40A. Note that in FIG. 40A, somecomponents are illustrated by broken lines in order to avoid complexityof the drawing.

The light-emitting device 3000 illustrated in FIGS. 40A and 40B includesa substrate 3001, a light-emitting element 3005 over the substrate 3001,a first sealing region 3007 provided around the light-emitting element3005, and a second sealing region 3009 provided around the first sealingregion 3007.

Light is emitted from the light-emitting element 3005 through one orboth of the substrate 3001 and a substrate 3003. In FIGS. 40A and 40B, astructure in which light is emitted from the light-emitting element 3005to the lower side (the substrate 3001 side) is illustrated.

As illustrated in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the light-emitting device 3000 hasa double sealing structure in which the light-emitting element 3005 issurrounded by the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealingregion 3009. With the double sealing structure, entry of impurities(e.g., water, oxygen, and the like) from the outside into thelight-emitting element 3005 can be favorably suppressed. Note that it isnot necessary to provide both the first sealing region 3007 and thesecond sealing region 3009. For example, only the first sealing region3007 may be provided.

Note that in FIG. 40B, the first sealing region 3007 and the secondsealing region 3009 are each provided in contact with the substrate 3001and the substrate 3003. However, without limitation to such a structure,for example, one or both of the first sealing region 3007 and the secondsealing region 3009 may be provided in contact with an insulating filmor a conductive film provided on the substrate 3001. Alternatively, oneor both of the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region3009 may be provided in contact with an insulating film or a conductivefilm provided on the substrate 3003.

The substrate 3001 and the substrate 3003 can have structures similar tothose of the substrate 200 and the substrate 220 described in the aboveembodiment, respectively. The light-emitting element 3005 can have astructure similar to that of any of the light-emitting elementsdescribed in the above embodiments.

For the first sealing region 3007, a material containing glass (e.g., aglass frit, a glass ribbon, and the like) can be used. For the secondsealing region 3009, a material containing a resin can be used. With theuse of the material containing glass for the first sealing region 3007,productivity and a sealing property can be improved. Moreover, with useof the material containing a resin for the second sealing region 3009,impact resistance and heat resistance can be improved. However, thematerials used for the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealingregion 3009 are not limited to the above, and the first sealing region3007 may be formed using the material containing a resin and the secondsealing region 3009 may be formed using the material containing glass.

The glass frit may contain, for example, magnesium oxide, calcium oxide,strontium oxide, barium oxide, cesium oxide, sodium oxide, potassiumoxide, boron oxide, vanadium oxide, zinc oxide, tellurium oxide,aluminum oxide, silicon dioxide, lead oxide, tin oxide, phosphorusoxide, ruthenium oxide, rhodium oxide, iron oxide, copper oxide,manganese dioxide, molybdenum oxide, niobium oxide, titanium oxide,tungsten oxide, bismuth oxide, zirconium oxide, lithium oxide, antimonyoxide, lead borate glass, tin phosphate glass, vanadate glass, orborosilicate glass. The glass frit preferably contains at least one kindof transition metal to absorb infrared light.

As the above glass frits, for example, a frit paste is applied to asubstrate and is subjected to heat treatment, laser light irradiation,or the like. The frit paste contains the glass frit and a resin (alsoreferred to as a binder) diluted by an organic solvent. Note that anabsorber which absorbs light having the wavelength of laser light may beadded to the glass frit. For example, an Nd:YAG laser or a semiconductorlaser is preferably used as the laser. The shape of laser light may becircular or quadrangular.

As the above material containing a resin, for example, polyester,polyolefin, polyamide (e.g., nylon, aramid), polyimide, polycarbonate,or an acrylic resin, polyurethane, or an epoxy resin can be used.Alternatively, a material that includes a resin having a siloxane bondsuch as silicone can be used.

Note that in the case where the material containing glass is used forone or both of the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealingregion 3009, the material containing glass preferably has a thermalexpansion coefficient close to that of the substrate 3001. With theabove structure, generation of a crack in the material containing glassor the substrate 3001 due to thermal stress can be suppressed.

For example, the following advantageous effect can be obtained in thecase where the material containing glass is used for the first sealingregion 3007 and the material containing a resin is used for the secondsealing region 3009.

The second sealing region 3009 is provided closer to an outer portion ofthe light-emitting device 3000 than the first sealing region 3007 is. Inthe light-emitting device 3000, distortion due to external force or thelike increases toward the outer portion. Thus, the outer portion of thelight-emitting device 3000 where a larger amount of distortion isgenerated, that is, the second sealing region 3009 is sealed using thematerial containing a resin and the first sealing region 3007 providedon an inner side of the second sealing region 3009 is sealed using thematerial containing glass, whereby the light-emitting device 3000 isless likely to be damaged even when distortion due to external force orthe like is generated.

Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 40B, a first region 3011 correspondsto the region surrounded by the substrate 3001, the substrate 3003, thefirst sealing region 3007, and the second sealing region 3009. A secondregion 3013 corresponds to the region surrounded by the substrate 3001,the substrate 3003, the light-emitting element 3005, and the firstsealing region 3007.

The first region 3011 and the second region 3013 are preferably filledwith, for example, an inert gas such as a rare gas or a nitrogen gas.Alternatively, the first region 3011 and the second region 3013 arepreferably filled with a resin such as an acrylic resin or an epoxyresin. Note that for the first region 3011 and the second region 3013, areduced pressure state is preferred to an atmospheric pressure state.

FIG. 40C illustrates a modification example of the structure in FIG.40B. FIG. 40C is a cross-sectional view illustrating the modificationexample of the light-emitting device 3000.

FIG. 40C illustrates a structure in which a desiccant 3018 is providedin a recessed portion provided in part of the substrate 3003. The othercomponents are the same as those of the structure illustrated in FIG.40B.

As the desiccant 3018, a substance which adsorbs moisture and the likeby chemical adsorption or a substance which adsorbs moisture and thelike by physical adsorption can be used. Examples of the substance thatcan be used as the desiccant 3018 include alkali metal oxides, alkalineearth metal oxide (e.g., calcium oxide, barium oxide, and the like),sulfate, metal halides, perchlorate, zeolite, silica gel, and the like.

Next, modification examples of the light-emitting device 3000 which isillustrated in FIG. 40B are described with reference to FIGS. 41A to41D. Note that FIGS. 41A to 41D are cross-sectional views illustratingthe modification examples of the light-emitting device 3000 illustratedin FIG. 40B.

In each of the light-emitting devices illustrated in FIGS. 41A to 41D,the second sealing region 3009 is not provided but only the firstsealing region 3007 is provided. Moreover, in each of the light-emittingdevices illustrated in FIGS. 41A to 41D, a region 3014 is providedinstead of the second region 3013 illustrated in FIG. 40B.

For the region 3014, for example, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide(e.g., nylon, aramid), polyimide, polycarbonate, an acrylic resin,polyurethane, or an epoxy resin can be used. Alternatively, a materialthat includes a resin having a siloxane bond such as silicone can beused.

When the above-described material is used for the region 3014, what iscalled a solid-sealing light-emitting device can be obtained.

In the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 41B, a substrate 3015is provided on the substrate 3001 side of the light-emitting deviceillustrated in FIG. 41A.

The substrate 3015 has unevenness as illustrated in FIG. 41B. With astructure in which the substrate 3015 having unevenness is provided onthe side through which light emitted from the light-emitting element3005 is extracted, the efficiency of extraction of light from thelight-emitting element 3005 can be improved. Note that instead of thestructure having unevenness and illustrated in FIG. 41B, a substratehaving a function as a diffusion plate may be provided.

In the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 41C, light is extractedthrough the substrate 3001 side, unlike in the light-emitting deviceillustrated in FIG. 28A, in which light is extracted through thesubstrate 3003 side.

The light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 41C includes the substrate3015 on the substrate 3003 side. The other components are the same asthose of the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 41B.

In the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 41D, the substrate 3003and the substrate 3015 included in the light-emitting device illustratedin FIG. 41C are not provided but a substrate 3016 is provided.

The substrate 3016 includes first unevenness positioned closer to thelight-emitting element 3005 and second unevenness positioned fartherfrom the light-emitting element 3005. With the structure illustrated inFIG. 41D, the efficiency of extraction of light from the light-emittingelement 3005 can be further improved.

Thus, the use of the structure described in this embodiment can obtain alight-emitting device in which deterioration of a light-emitting devicedue to impurities such as moisture and oxygen is suppressed.Alternatively, with the structure described in this embodiment, alight-emitting device having high light extraction efficiency can beobtained.

Note that the structure described in this embodiment can be combined asappropriate with any of the structures described in the otherembodiments.

Embodiment 9

In this embodiment, examples in which the light-emitting device of oneembodiment of the present invention is applied to various lightingdevices and electronic devices will be described with reference to FIGS.42A to 42C and FIG. 43.

An electronic device or a lighting device that has a light-emittingregion with a curved surface can be obtained with use of thelight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention whichis manufactured over a substrate having flexibility.

Furthermore, a light-emitting device to which one embodiment of thepresent invention is applied can also be used for lighting for motorvehicles, examples of which are lighting for a dashboard, a windshield,a ceiling, and the like.

FIG. 42A is a perspective view illustrating one surface of amultifunction terminal 3500, and FIG. 42B is a perspective viewillustrating the other surface of the multifunction terminal 3500. In ahousing 3502 of the multifunction terminal 3500, a display portion 3504,a camera 3506, lighting 3508, and the like are incorporated. Thelight-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention can beused for the lighting 3508.

The lighting 3508 that includes the light-emitting device of oneembodiment of the present invention functions as a planar light source.Thus, unlike a point light source typified by an LED, the lighting 3508can provide light emission with low directivity. When the lighting 3508and the camera 3506 are used in combination, for example, imaging can beperformed by the camera 3506 with the lighting 3508 lighting orflashing. Because the lighting 3508 functions as a planar light source,a photograph as if taken under natural light can be taken.

Note that the multifunction terminal 3500 illustrated in FIGS. 42A and42B can have a variety of functions as in the electronic devicesillustrated in FIGS. 35A to 35G.

The housing 3502 can include a speaker, a sensor (a sensor having afunction of measuring force, displacement, position, speed,acceleration, angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light,liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time,hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation,flow rate, humidity, gradient, oscillation, odor, or infrared rays), amicrophone, and the like. When a detection device including a sensor fordetecting inclination, such as a gyroscope or an acceleration sensor, isprovided inside the multifunction terminal 3500, display on the screenof the display portion 3504 can be automatically switched by determiningthe orientation of the multifunction terminal 3500 (whether themultifunction terminal is placed horizontally or vertically for alandscape mode or a portrait mode).

The display portion 3504 may function as an image sensor. For example,an image of a palm print, a fingerprint, or the like is taken when thedisplay portion 3504 is touched with the palm or the finger, wherebypersonal authentication can be performed. Furthermore, by providing abacklight or a sensing light source which emits near-infrared light inthe display portion 3504, an image of a finger vein, a palm vein, or thelike can be taken. Note that the light-emitting device of one embodimentof the present invention may be used for the display portion 3504.

FIG. 42C is a perspective view of a security light 3600. The securitylight 3600 includes lighting 3608 on the outside of the housing 3602,and a speaker 3610 and the like are incorporated in the housing 3602.The light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention canbe used for the lighting 3608.

The security light 3600 emits light when the lighting 3608 is gripped orheld, for example. An electronic circuit that can control the manner oflight emission from the security light 3600 may be provided in thehousing 3602. The electronic circuit may be a circuit that enables lightemission once or intermittently a plurality of times or may be a circuitthat can adjust the amount of emitted light by controlling the currentvalue for light emission. A circuit with which a loud audible alarm isoutput from the speaker 3610 at the same time as light emission from thelighting 3608 may be incorporated.

The security light 3600 can emit light in various directions; therefore,it is possible to intimidate a thug or the like with light, or light andsound. Moreover, the security light 3600 may include a camera such as adigital still camera to have a photography function.

FIG. 43 illustrates an example in which the light-emitting device isused for an interior lighting device 8501. Since the light-emittingdevice can have a large area, it can be used for a lighting devicehaving a large area. In addition, a lighting device 8502 in which alight-emitting region has a curved surface can also be formed with useof a housing with a curved surface. A light-emitting device described inthis embodiment is in the form of a thin film, which allows the housingto be designed more freely. Therefore, the lighting device can beelaborately designed in a variety of ways. Furthermore, a wall of theroom may be provided with a large-sized lighting device 8503. Touchsensors may be provided in the lighting devices 8501, 8502, and 8503 tocontrol the power on/off of the lighting devices.

Moreover, when the light-emitting device is used on the surface side ofa table, a lighting device 8504 which has a function as a table can beobtained. When the light-emitting device is used as part of otherfurniture, a lighting device that functions as the furniture can beobtained.

As described above, lighting devices and electronic devices can beobtained by application of the light-emitting device of one embodimentof the present invention. Note that the light-emitting device can beused for electronic devices in a variety of fields without being limitedto the lighting devices and the electronic devices described in thisembodiment.

The structure described in this embodiment can be combined with any ofthe structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Example 1

In this example, examples of fabricating light-emitting devices ofembodiments of the present invention are described. FIGS. 44A and 44Bare each a cross-sectional schematic view of a light-emitting element inthe light-emitting device fabricated in this example. Tables 1 to 4 showthe details of the element structures of the light-emitting devices. Inaddition, structures and abbreviations of compounds used here are givenbelow.

TABLE 1 Reference Thickness Weight Layer numeral (nm) Material ratioLight-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 1 Electron-injection layer639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15 NBphen — 638(1) 302mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Intermediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-injection layer 631 95 PCPPn:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642(3) 10 ITSO — 642(2) 20 APC — 642(1) 70 ITSO —Light-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 2 Electron-injection layer639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15 NBphen — 638(1) 302mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Intermediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-injection layer 631 50 PCPPn:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642(3) 10 ITSO — 642(2) 20 APC — 642(1) 70 ITSO —

TABLE 2 Reference Thickness Weight Layer numeral (nm) Material ratioLight-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 3 Electron-injection layer639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15 NBphen — 638(1) 302mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Inteemediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-intjection layer 631 5 PCPPn:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642(3) 10 ITSO — 642(2) 20 APC — 642(1) 70 ITSO —

TABLE 3 Reference Thickness Weight Layer numeral (nm) Material ratioLight-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 4 Electron-injection layer639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15 NBphen — 638(1) 302mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Intermediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-injection layer 631 5 PCPPn:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642 70 ITSO — Light-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 5Electron-injection layer 639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15NBphen — 638(1) 30 2mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Intermediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-injection layer 631 20 PCPPn:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642 70 ITSO —

TABLE 4 Reference Thickness Weight Layer numeral (nm) Material ratioLight-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 6 Electron-injection layer639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15 NBphen — 638(1) 302mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Intermediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-injection layer 631 35 PCPPn MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642 70 ITSO — Light-emitting Electrode 641 120 Al — element 7Electron-injection layer 639 1 LiF — Electron-transport layer 638(2) 15NBphen — 638(1) 30 2mDBTBPDBq-II — Light-emitting layer 646(3) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(2) 102mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm) 0.8:0.2:0.06 646(1) 202mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) 0.8:0.2:0.06 Hole-transport layer637 15 BPAFLP — Intermediate layer 635 10 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5Electron-injection layer 634(2) 2 CuPc — 634(1) 0.1 Li₂O —Electron-transport layer 633(2) 15 NBPhen — 633(1) 10 cgDBCzPA —Light-emitting layer 644 25 cgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03 1:0.03 Hole-transportlayer 632 15 PCPPn — Hole-injection layer 631 50 PCPPn MoO₃ 1:0.5Electrode 642 70 ITSO —

<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Element> <<Fabrication of Light-EmittingElement 1>>

An electrode 642 was formed such that ITSO, an alloy of silver,palladium, and copper (also referred to as Ag—Pd—Cu or APC), and ITSOwere deposited over a substrate 650 in this order to a thickness of 70nm, a thickness of 20 nm, and a thickness of 10 nm, respectively. TheITSO is a conductive film having a function of transmitting light, theAPC film is a conductive film having functions of reflecting light andtransmitting light. The electrode area of the electrode 642 was set to 4mm² (2 mm×2 mm).

As a hole-injection layer 631,3-[4-(9-phenanthryl)-phenyl]-9-phenyl-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCPPn)and molybdenum oxide (MoO₃) were deposited over the electrode 642 byco-evaporation to a thickness of 95 nm such that the weight ratio ofPCPPn to MoO₃ was 1:0.5.

As a hole-transport layer 632, PCPPn was deposited over thehole-injection layer 631 by evaporation to a thickness of 15 nm.

Next, as a light-emitting layer 644,7-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-7H-dibenzo[c,g]carbazole(abbreviation: cgDBCzPA) andN,N-(pyrene-1,6-diyl)bis[(6,N-diphenylbenzo[b]naphtho[1,2-d]furan)-8-amine](abbreviation:1,6BnfAPrn-03) were deposited over the hole-transport layer 632 byco-evaporation such that the deposited layer has a weight ratio ofcgDBCzPA:1,6BnfAPrn-03=1:0.03 and a thickness of 25 nm.

Next, as an electron-transport layer 633, cgDBCzPA and2,9-bis(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline (abbreviation:NBPhen) were deposited sequentially over the light-emitting layer 644 byevaporation to thicknesses of 10 nm and 15 nm, respectively.

As an electron-injection layer 634, lithium oxide (abbreviation: Li₂O)and copper phthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPc) were sequentiallydeposited over the electron-transport layer 633 by evaporation tothicknesses of 0.1 nm and 2 nm, respectively.

As a charge-generation layer 635 serving as a hole-injection layer,4,4′,4″-(benzene-1,3,5-triyl)tri(dibenzothiophene) (abbreviation:DBT3P-II) and molybdenum oxide (MoO₃) were deposited by co-evaporationin a weight ratio of DBT3P-II:MoO₃=1:0.5 to a thickness of 10 nm.

Then, as a hole-transport layer 637,4-phenyl-4′-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: BPAFLP)was deposited over the charge-generation layer 635 by evaporation to athickness of 15 nm.

A light-emitting layer 646 was formed in the following manner. First,2-[3′-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline(abbreviation: 2mDBTBPDBq-II),N-(1,1′-biphenyl-4-yl)-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]-9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-amine(abbreviation: PCBBiF), and(acetylacetonato)bis(6-tert-butyl-4-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) were deposited by co-evaporation in aweight ratio of 2mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac)=0.8:0.2:0.06 to athickness of 20 nm. Then, 2mDBTBPDBq-II, PCBBiF, andbis{4,6-dimethyl-2-[5-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-3-(3,5-dimethylphenyl)-2-pyrazinyl-κN]phenyl-κC}(2,8-dimethyl-4,6-nonanedionato-κ²O,O′)iridium(III)(abbreviation: Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm)) were deposited by co-evaporationin a weight ratio of2mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(dmdppr-dmp)₂(divm)=0.8:0.2:0.06 to a thicknessof 10 nm. Then, 2mDBTBPDBq-II, PCBBiF, and Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac) weredeposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of2mDBTBPDBq-II:PCBBiF:Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac)=0.8:0.2:0.06 to a thickness of 10nm.

Next, as an electron-transport layer 638, 2mDBTBPDBq-II and NBPhen weresequentially deposited over the light-emitting layer 646 by evaporationto thicknesses of 30 nm and 15 nm, respectively. As anelectron-injection layer 639, lithium fluoride (LiF) was deposited overthe electron-transport layer 638 by evaporation to a thickness of 1 nm.

As an electrode 641, an aluminum (Al) film was formed over theelectron-injection layer 639 to a thickness of 120 nm.

Next, in a glove box containing a nitrogen atmosphere, light-emittingelement 1 was sealed by fixing a substrate 652 to the substrate 650 overwhich the organic material was deposited using a sealant for an organicEL device. Specifically, after the sealant was applied to surround theorganic materials over the substrate 650 and the substrate 652 wasbonded to the substrate 650, the sealant was irradiated with ultravioletlight having a wavelength of 365 nm at 6 J/cm² and heat treatment wasperformed at 80° C. for 1 hour. Through the process, the light-emittingelement 1 was obtained.

As an optical element 648 with which the light-emitting element 1overlaps, a red color filter (CF red) was formed to a thickness of 2.1 mover a substrate 654.

<<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Elements 2 and 3>>

Light-emitting elements 2 and 3 were fabricated through the same stepsand materials as those for the light-emitting element 1 described aboveexcept for the step of forming the hole-injection layer 631 and thematerial of the optical element 648.

The hole-injection layer 631 of the light-emitting element 2 wasdeposited by co-evaporation of PCPPn and MoO₃ such that the depositedlayer has a weight ratio of PCPPn:MoO₃=1:0.5 and a thickness of 50 nm.

As the optical element 648 with which the light-emitting element 2overlaps, a green color filter (CF Green) was formed to a thickness of1.2 m over a substrate 654.

The hole-injection layer 631 of the light-emitting element 3 wasdeposited by co-evaporation of PCPPn and MoO₃ such that the depositedlayer has a weight ratio of PCPPn:MoO₃=1:0.5 and a thickness of 35 nm.

As the optical element 648 with which the light-emitting element 3overlaps, a blue color filter (CF Blue) was formed to a thickness of 0.8m over a substrate 654.

<<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Element 4>>

A light-emitting element 4 was fabricated through the same steps asthose for the light-emitting element 1 described above except for thesteps of forming the electrode 642, the hole-injection layer 631, andthe optical element 648. The light-emitting element 4 is not providedwith an optical element.

As the electrode 642 of the light-emitting element 4, ITSO was formedover the substrate 650 to a thickness of 70 nm. The ITSO film was aconductive film having a function of transmitting light. The electrodearea of the electrode 642 was set to 4 mm² (2 mm×2 mm).

Next, as the hole-injection layer 631 of the light-emitting element 4was deposited by co-evaporation of PCPPn and MoO₃ over the electrode 642such that the deposited layer has a weight ratio of PCPPn:MoO₃=1:0.5 anda thickness of 5 nm.

<<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Elements 5 to 7>>

The light-emitting elements 5 to 7 were fabricated through the samesteps as those for the light-emitting element 4 except for the step offorming the hole-injection layer 631.

The hole-injection layer 631 of the light-emitting element 5 wasdeposited by co-evaporation of PCPPn and MoO₃ such that the depositedlayer has a weight ratio of PCPPn:MoO₃=1:0.5 and a thickness of 20 nm.

The hole-injection layer 631 of the light-emitting element 6 wasdeposited by co-evaporation of PCPPn and MoO₃ such that the depositedlayer has a weight ratio of PCPPn:MoO₃=1:0.5 and a thickness of 35 nm.

The hole-injection layer 631 of the light-emitting element 7 wasdeposited by co-evaporation of PCPPn and MoO₃ such that the depositedlayer has a weight ratio of PCPPn:MoO₃=1:0.5 and a thickness of 50 nm.

<Characteristics of Light-Emitting Element>

FIGS. 45 and 46 show luminance-current density characteristics of thefabricated light-emitting elements 1 to 7. FIGS. 47 and 48 show currentdensity-voltage characteristics thereof. FIGS. 49 and 50 show currentefficiency-luminance characteristics thereof. For measuring theluminance and the CIE chromaticity, a luminance colorimeter (BM-5Aproduced by Topcon Technohouse Corporation) was used. The measurementwas performed at room temperature (an atmosphere where a temperature of23° C. was held).

FIGS. 51 and 52 show electroluminescence spectra (EL spectra) when acurrent at a current density of 2.5 mA/cm² was supplied to thelight-emitting elements 1 to 7. For measuring the electroluminescencespectrum, a multi-channel spectrometer (PMA-11 produced by HamamatsuPhotonics K.K.) was used. Note that in FIGS. 51 and 52, the verticalaxis represents the emission intensity (EL intensity) normalized by themaximum values of the electroluminescence spectra.

Tables 5 and 6 show element characteristics of the light-emittingelements 1 to 7 at around 1000 cd/m².

TABLE 5 Current CIR Current Voltage density chromaticity Luminanceefficiency (V) (mA/cm²) (x, y) (cd/m²) (cd/A) Light-emitting element 16.8  5.72 (0.670, 0.323) 980 17 Light-emitting element 2 6.0  1.17(0.278, 0.688) 820 70 Light-emitting element 3 7.6 15.6 (0.148, 0.078)930  6.0

TABLE 6 Current CIR Current Voltage density chromaticity Luminanceefficiency (V) (mA/cm²) (x, y) (cd/m²) cd/A) Light-emitting element 46.0 1.33 (0.350, 0.332)  820 62 Light-emitting element 5 6.2 2.05(0.316, 0.312) 1200 58 Light-emitting element 6 6.0 1.34 (0.316, 0.345) 810 60 Light-emitting element 7 6.0 1.35 (0.327, 0.403)  930 69

As shown in FIG. 51, the light-emitting element 1 has a peak wavelengthof the electroluminescence spectrum of 615 nm and emits red light, thelight-emitting element 2 has a peak wavelength of 538 nm and emits greenlight, and the light-emitting element 3 has a peak wavelength of 457 nmand emits blue light. In addition, in the light-emitting elements 1, 2,and 3, the full widths at half maximum of the electroluminescencespectra are 34 nm, 31 nm, and 20 nm, respectively. Each light-emittingelement enabled light to be emitted with high color purity.

As shown in FIG. 52, each of the light-emitting elements 4 to 7 haspeaks in the red wavelength range, the green wavelength range, and theblue wavelength range in the electroluminescence spectrum, and emitswhite light.

Each of the light-emitting layers 644 and 646, the hole-transport layers632 and 637, the electron-transport layers 633 and 638, theelectron-injection layers 634 and 639, and the charge-generation layer635, and the electrode 641 has the same structure between thelight-emitting elements 1 to 7. Furthermore, each of the light-emittingelements 1 to 3 where the electrode 642 includes the conductive filmhaving functions of reflecting light and transmitting light has amicrocavity structure. Each of the light-emitting elements 4 to 7 wherethe electrode 642 includes the conductive film having a function oftransmitting light has no microcavity structure. It is found that acolor of light emitted from the light-emitting element to the outsidecan be changed when the structures of the electrode 642 and thehole-injection layer 631 in the light-emitting element are just changed.

As shown in FIG. 45 to FIG. 50, Table 5, and Table 6, the light-emittingelements 1 to 3 emitting red light, green light, and blue light,respectively, have high current efficiency, and the light-emittingelements 4 to 7 emitting white light have high current efficiency. Thus,each structure of the light-emitting elements can be suitably used forthe light-emitting device.

<Estimation of Power Consumption of Light-Emitting Device>

Next, the power consumption of the light-emitting device including theabove light-emitting element was estimated.

A light-emitting device 1 includes the light-emitting element 1, thelight-emitting element 2, and the light-emitting element 3. Alight-emitting device 2 includes the light-emitting element 1, thelight-emitting element 2, the light-emitting element 3, and thelight-emitting element 4. A light-emitting device 3 includes thelight-emitting element 1, the light-emitting element 2, thelight-emitting element 3, and the light-emitting element 5. Alight-emitting device 4 includes the light-emitting element 1, thelight-emitting element 2, the light-emitting element 3, and thelight-emitting element 6. A light-emitting device 5 includes thelight-emitting element 1, the light-emitting element 2, thelight-emitting element 3, and the light-emitting element 7. Thestructure of the light-emitting device is shown in Table 7.

TABLE 7 Subpixel 1 Subpixel 2 Subpixel 3 Subpixel 4 Light-emittingdevice 1 Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emitting — element 1element 2 element 3 Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emittingLight-emitting Light-emitting device 2 element 1 element 2 element 3element 4 Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emittingLight-emitting device 3 element 1 element 2 element 3 element 5Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emittingLight-emitting device 4 element 1 element 2 element 3 element 6Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emitting Light-emittingLight-emitting device 5 element 1 element 2 element 3 element 7

In this example, the power consumption of the light-emitting devices wasestimated on the assumption that the display region of thelight-emitting device had an aspect ratio of 16:9, a diagonal of 4.3inches, and an area of 50.97 cm², and the aperture ratio was 35%. Table8 shows characteristics of the light-emitting elements and thelight-emitting devices with the above specifications in the case wherethe entire surface of the display region displayed white (chromaticitycoordinates (x,y)=(0.313, 0.329)) with a color temperature of 6500 K at300 cd/m².

TABLE 8 Current CIR Current Power Voltage density chromaticity Luminanceefficiency consumption (V) (mA/cm²) (x, y) (cd/m²) (cd/A) (mW)Light-emitting Light-emitting 6.5 3.6 (0.670, 0.323) 603 16.6 141 device1 element 1 Light-emitting 6.3 2.4 (0.277, 0.690) 1689 71.6 89 element 2Light-emitting 6.7 4.7 (0.148, 0.080) 280 5.91 187 element 3Light-emitting Light-emitting 0.0 0.0 (0.674, 0.321) 0 — 0 device 2element 1 Light-emitting 5.8 0.8 (0.278, 0.689) 573 69.6 21 element 2Light-emitting 6.1 1.6 (0.149, 0.083) 95 5.79 44 element 3Light-emitting 6.6 4.5 (0.339, 0.327) 2761 61.9 132 element 4Light-emitting Light-emitting 5.5 0.3 (0.674, 0.321) 71 20.2 9 device 3element 1 Light-emitting 5.7 0.6 (0.278, 0.689) 429 68.7 16 element 2Light-emitting 0.0 0.0 (0.149, 0.085) 0 — 0 element 3 Light-emitting 6.75.0 (0.307, 0.306) 2929 58.0 151 element 5 Light-emitting Light-emitting5.7 0.7 (0.671, 0.323) 127 19.5 17 device 4 element 1 Light-emitting 0.00.0 (0.278, 0.689) 0 — 0 element 2 Light-emitting 5.6 0.5 (0.149, 0.085)28 5.5 13 element 3 Light-emitting 6.8 5.4 (0.304, 0.338) 3274 60.7 162element 6 Light-emitting Light-emitting 6.1 1.5 (0.670, 0.324) 284 18.541 device 5 element 1 Light-emitting 0.0 0.0 (0.278, 0.689) 0 — 0element 2 Light-emitting 6.4 2.9 (0.149, 0.082) 173 5.9 84 element 3Light-emitting 6.6 4.3 (0.317, 0.399) 2972 69.4 126 element 7

As shown in Table 8, white color (chromaticity coordinates (x,y)=(0.313,0.329)) with a color temperature of 6500 K was able to be displayed at300 cd/m² on the entire display region in the light-emitting device 1having the above specifications when luminance of the light-emittingelement 1 was 603 cd/m², luminance of the light-emitting element 2 was1689 cd/m², and luminance of the light-emitting element 3 was 280 cd/m².At this time, power consumption of the light-emitting device 1 was ableto be estimated to be 417 mW.

White color (chromaticity coordinates (x,y)=(0.313, 0.329)) with a colortemperature of 6500 K was able to be displayed at 300 cd/m² on theentire display region in the light-emitting device 2 having the abovespecifications when luminance of the light-emitting element 1 was 0cd/m², luminance of the light-emitting element 2 was 573 cd/m²,luminance of the light-emitting element 3 was 95 cd/m², and luminance ofthe light-emitting element 4 was 2761 cd/m². At this time, powerconsumption of the light-emitting device 2 was able to be estimated tobe 198 mW.

White color (chromaticity coordinates (x,y)=(0.313, 0.329)) with a colortemperature of 6500 K was able to be displayed at 300 cd/m² on theentire display region in the light-emitting device 3 having the abovespecifications when luminance of the light-emitting element 1 was 71cd/m², luminance of the light-emitting element 2 was 429 cd/m²,luminance of the light-emitting element 3 was 0 cd/m², and luminance ofthe light-emitting element 5 was 2929 cd/m². At this time, powerconsumption of the light-emitting device 3 was able to be estimated tobe 176 mW.

White color (chromaticity coordinates (x,y)=(0.313, 0.329)) with a colortemperature of 6500 K was able to be displayed at 300 cd/m² on theentire display region in the light-emitting device 4 having the abovespecifications when luminance of the light-emitting element 1 was 127cd/m², luminance of the light-emitting element 2 was 0 cd/m², luminanceof the light-emitting element 3 was 28 cd/m², and luminance of thelight-emitting element 4 was 3274 cd/m². At this time, power consumptionof the light-emitting device 4 was able to be estimated to be 192 mW.

White color (chromaticity coordinates (x,y)=(0.313, 0.329)) with a colortemperature of 6500 K was able to be displayed at 300 cd/m² on theentire display region in the light-emitting device 5 having the abovespecifications when luminance of the light-emitting element 1 was 284cd/m², luminance of the light-emitting element 2 was 0 cd/m², luminanceof the light-emitting element 3 was 173 cd/m², and luminance of thelight-emitting element 4 was 2792 cd/m². At this time, power consumptionof the light-emitting device 5 was able to be estimated to be 251 mW.

The regions where the color gamut according to the National TelevisionSystem Committee (NTSC) can be displayed in the light-emitting devices 1to 5 were each estimated to be 96% by an area ratio (NTSC ratio) of theCIE 1976 chromaticity coordinates, which indicates that thelight-emitting devices 1 to 5 have high color reproducibility.

Through the above, it is found that the light-emitting devices 2 to 5consume lower power than that in the light-emitting device 1. Inparticular, the power consumed by each of the light-emitting devices 2to 4 is lower than or equal to half of the power consumed by thelight-emitting device 1. In other words, when a light-emitting deviceincludes red, green, and blue light-emitting elements with microcavitystructures and a white light-emitting element without a microcavitystructure, the light-emitting device has low power consumption.

As described above, according to one embodiment of the presentinvention, a light-emitting device with low power consumption can beprovided. Furthermore, according to one embodiment of the presentinvention, a light-emitting device with low power consumption and highcolor reproducibility can be provided.

The structures described in this example can be used in an appropriatecombination with any of the other embodiments.

This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial no.2016-011518 filed with Japan Patent Office on Jan. 25, 2016, andJapanese Patent Application serial no. 2016-015550 filed with JapanPatent Office on Jan. 29, 2016, the entire contents of which are herebyincorporated by reference.

What is claimed is:
 1. A light-emitting device comprising: a firstlight-emitting element comprising a first electrode, a second electrode,and an electroluminescence layer including a light-emitting layer; and asecond light-emitting element comprising the first electrode, a thirdelectrode, and the electroluminescence layer including thelight-emitting layer, wherein the second electrode consists of a firstconductive film, wherein the third electrode comprises a secondconductive film, a third conductive film over the second conductivefilm, and a fourth conductive film over the third conductive film,wherein each of the second conductive film and the fourth conductivefilm comprises an oxide including indium, and wherein the thirdconductive film comprises silver.
 2. The light-emitting device accordingto claim 1, wherein the oxide including indium further comprises tin. 3.The light-emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the firstlight-emitting element is configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in at least one of a blue wavelength range, a greenwavelength range, a yellow wavelength range, and a red wavelength range,and wherein the second light-emitting element is configured to emitlight having a peak of an emission spectrum in at least one of a bluewavelength range, a green wavelength range, and a red wavelength range.4. The light-emitting device according to claim 1, wherein theelectroluminescence layer comprises a second light-emitting layer. 5.The light-emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the thirdconductive film comprises a metal with a thickness greater than or equalto 1 nm and less than or equal to 30 nm.
 6. The light-emitting deviceaccording to claim 1, wherein the first electrode comprises at least oneof silver and aluminum.
 7. A light-emitting device comprising: a firstlight-emitting element comprising a first electrode, a second electrode,and an electroluminescence layer including a light-emitting layer; and asecond light-emitting element comprising the first electrode, a thirdelectrode, and the electroluminescence layer including thelight-emitting layer, wherein the second electrode consists of a firstconductive film, wherein the third electrode comprises a secondconductive film, a third conductive film over the second conductivefilm, and a fourth conductive film over the third conductive film,wherein each of the second conductive film and the fourth conductivefilm comprises indium tin oxide containing silicon, and wherein thethird conductive film comprises silver.
 8. The light-emitting deviceaccording to claim 7, wherein the first light-emitting element isconfigured to emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in atleast one of a blue wavelength range, a green wavelength range, a yellowwavelength range, and a red wavelength range, and wherein the secondlight-emitting element is configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in at least one of a blue wavelength range, a greenwavelength range, and a red wavelength range.
 9. The light-emittingdevice according to claim 7, wherein the electroluminescence layercomprises a second light-emitting layer.
 10. The light-emitting deviceaccording to claim 7, wherein the third conductive film comprises ametal with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than orequal to 30 nm.
 11. The light-emitting device according to claim 7,wherein the first electrode comprises at least one of silver andaluminum.
 12. A light-emitting device comprising: a first light-emittingelement comprising a first electrode, a second electrode, and anelectroluminescence layer including a light-emitting layer; a secondlight-emitting element comprising the first electrode, a thirdelectrode, and the electroluminescence layer including thelight-emitting layer; a third light-emitting element comprising thefirst electrode, a fourth electrode, and the electroluminescence layerincluding the light-emitting layer; and a fourth light-emitting elementcomprising the first electrode, a fifth electrode, and theelectroluminescence layer including the light-emitting layer, whereinthe second electrode comprises a first conductive film, wherein thethird electrode comprises a second conductive film, a third conductivefilm over the second conductive film, and a fourth conductive film overthe third conductive film, wherein the fourth electrode comprises thesecond conductive film, the third conductive film over the secondconductive film, and a fifth conductive film over the third conductivefilm, wherein the fifth electrode comprises the second conductive film,the third conductive film over the second conductive film, and a sixthconductive film over the third conductive film, wherein each of thesecond conductive film, the fourth conductive film, the fifth conductivefilm, and the sixth conductive film comprises an oxide including indium,wherein the third conductive film comprises silver, wherein the fourthconductive film is thicker than the fifth conductive film, and whereinthe fifth conductive film is thicker than the sixth conductive film. 13.The light-emitting device according to claim 12, wherein the oxideincluding indium further comprises tin.
 14. The light-emitting deviceaccording to claim 12, wherein the first light-emitting element isconfigured to emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in atleast one of a blue wavelength range, a green wavelength range, a yellowwavelength range, and a red wavelength range, and wherein the secondlight-emitting element is configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in a red wavelength range, wherein the thirdlight-emitting element is configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in a green wavelength range, and wherein the fourthlight-emitting element is configured to emit light having a peak of anemission spectrum in a blue wavelength range.
 15. The light-emittingdevice according to claim 12, wherein the electroluminescence layercomprises a second light-emitting layer.
 16. The light-emitting deviceaccording to claim 12, wherein the third conductive film comprises ametal with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than orequal to 30 nm.
 17. The light-emitting device according to claim 12,wherein the first electrode comprises at least one of silver andaluminum.
 18. A light-emitting device comprising: a first light-emittingelement comprising a first electrode, a second electrode, and anelectroluminescence layer including a light-emitting layer; a secondlight-emitting element comprising the first electrode, a thirdelectrode, and the electroluminescence layer including thelight-emitting layer; a third light-emitting element comprising thefirst electrode, a fourth electrode, and the electroluminescence layerincluding the light-emitting layer; and a fourth light-emitting elementcomprising the first electrode, a fifth electrode, and theelectroluminescence layer including the light-emitting layer, whereinthe second electrode comprises a first conductive film, wherein thethird electrode comprises a second conductive film, a third conductivefilm over the second conductive film, and a fourth conductive film overthe third conductive film, wherein the fourth electrode comprises thesecond conductive film, the third conductive film over the secondconductive film, and a fifth conductive film over the third conductivefilm, wherein the fifth electrode comprises the second conductive film,the third conductive film over the second conductive film, and a sixthconductive film over the third conductive film, wherein each of thesecond conductive film, the fourth conductive film, the fifth conductivefilm, and the sixth conductive film comprises an oxide including indium,wherein the third conductive film comprises silver, and wherein anuppermost surface of the second electrode, the third electrode, thefourth electrode, and the fifth electrode are not aligned.
 19. Thelight-emitting device according to claim 18, wherein the oxide includingindium further comprises tin.
 20. The light-emitting device according toclaim 18, wherein the first light-emitting element is configured to emitlight having a peak of an emission spectrum in at least one of a bluewavelength range, a green wavelength range, a yellow wavelength range,and a red wavelength range, wherein the second light-emitting element isconfigured to emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in a redwavelength range, wherein the third light-emitting element is configuredto emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in a greenwavelength range, and wherein the fourth light-emitting element isconfigured to emit light having a peak of an emission spectrum in a bluewavelength range.
 21. The light-emitting device according to claim 18,wherein the electroluminescence layer comprises a second light-emittinglayer.
 22. The light-emitting device according to claim 18, wherein thethird conductive film comprises a metal with a thickness greater than orequal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 30 nm.
 23. The light-emittingdevice according to claim 18, wherein the first electrode comprises atleast one of silver and aluminum.